Contents chapter 3

Safety Detection Solutions

Safety interlock switches Selection guide: Safety interlock switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/2 to 3/5

1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/6 to 3/21

Safety interlock switches, actuator operated b b b b b

2

Presentation, General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal, turret head, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC and XCSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0HWDO¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&6/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3ODVWLFGRXEOHLQVXODWHG¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&603 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plastic, turret head, types XCSPA, XCSTA and XCSTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3/22 3/24 3/26 3/40 3/44

Safety interlock switches with rotary lever or rotary shaft operator

3

b Presentation, General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/50 b Plastic, double insulated, turret head, W\SHV;&63/;&67/;&635DQG;&675 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/52

Non-contact safety interlock switches

4

b b v v b

5

Presentation, General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plastic, pre-cabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connector on pigtail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3/54 3/56 3/57 3/58

Non-contact safety interlock systems b b v v b

6

Presentation, General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plastic, solid-state PNP type output, Pre-cabled connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M12 connector connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3/66 3/68 3/69 3/70

Safety limit switches Metal, miniature b Presentation, General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/74 b Pre-cabled, type XCSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/76

7

Compact b Presentation, General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/78 b Metal, type XCSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/80 b Plastic, type XCSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/82

8

9

10

3/0 2

Light curtains Selection guide: Light curtains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/84 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/88

1

Light curtains, type 4 )RU¿QJHURUKDQGSURWHFWLRQ b b b b b

2SWLPXPOLJKWFXUWDLQVZLWKVROLGVWDWHRXWSXWW\SH;86/%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/92 8QLYHUVDOOLJKWFXUWDLQVZLWKVROLGVWDWHRXWSXWW\SH;86/' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/93 Substitution table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/102 0XWLQJPRGXOHIRU;86/'0XQLYHUVDOOLJKWFXUWDLQVW\SH;36/&0 . . . . . . 3/106 Compact light curtains with solid-state output, W\SH;86/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/111

For body protection b Compact light curtains with solid-state output, W\SH;86/3 v with connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/119 v with terminal block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/120

Light curtains, type 2

2

3

4

For hand protection b Slim, compact light curtains with solid-state output, W\SH;86/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/127 For body protection b Preventa safety modules and single-beam photo-electric sensors, type XPSCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/140

5

Accessories for light curtains types 2 and 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/130

6

7

8

9

10

3/1 3

Selection guide

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches

Applications

Protection of operators by stopping the machine when the actuating key (attached to machine guard) is withdrawn from the head of the switch

1

All heavy industrial machines, with quick rundown time (1) All heavy and light industrial machines, with slow rundown time (2)

Device

Actuator operated safety interlock switches

811020

811019

811021

2

3

4

5

Conformity to standards

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n°14, JIS C4520

Machine assemblies

IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088/ISO 14119, EN/ISO 12100

3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV

UL, CSA

Enclosure

Metal

Degree of protection

IP 67

Dimensions (w x h x d) inches (mm)

6

Products

Switch

1.58 x 4.47 x 1.73 (40 x 113.5 x 44)

2.05 x 4.47 x 1.73 (52 x 113.5 x 44)

3.86 x 5.75 x 1.73 (98 x 146 x 44)

Mounting

1.18 x 2.36 (30 x 60)

1.18 x 2.36 (30 x 60)

3.47 x 3.74 (88 x 95)

Features

Without locking of actuator. Turret head: 8 positions for insertion of actuator.

Manual locking and unlocking of actuator by pushbutton or key operated lock (can be mounted on left or right-hand side of switch head). Turret head: 8 positions for insertion of actuator.

Locking and unlocking of actuator by solenoid (either locking without power or locking with power). Manual unlocking (using key lock) of actuator in abnormal conditions. Turret head: 8 positions for insertion of actuator.

Contact blocks

Safety contacts actuated by the actuator. Slow break with positive opening operation

7 N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.C.

8

9

Connection

Screw clamp terminals. Tapped entry for n° 13 cable gland, tapped ISO M20 x 1.5 or tapped 1/2” NPT

1 conduit entry

10

Type references

Page

N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.C. + N.C. + N.O. auxiliary contact with positive opening operation, controlled by solenoid

XCSA 3/24

2 conduit entries

XCSB, XCSC

XCSE 3/25

(1) Stopping time of machine less than time taken for operator to access hazardous zone. (2) Stopping time of machine greater than time taken for operator to access hazardous zone.

3/2

All light industrial machines, with quick rundown time (1)

All light industrial machines, with slow rundown time (2)

811025

811022

540091

1

2

811024

All heavy and light industrial machines, with slow rundown time (2)

3

4

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC 68-2-30, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14, JIS C4520 IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088/ISO 14119, EN/ISO 12100 UL, CSA

cULus, BG

Metal

Plastic

UL, CSA

5

IP 67 1.58 x 7.64 x 3.09 (40 x 194 x 78)

1.18 x 3.4 x 0.6 (30 x 87 x 15)

1.18 x 2.36 (30 x 60)

Centers: 0.79 x 0.87 (20 x 22)

Locking and unlocking of actuating key by solenoid (either locking without power or locking with power versions). Manual unlocking (using Ronis key lock) of actuating key in abnormal conditions. Turret head: 4 alternative access points for insertion of actuating key.

Without locking of actuator. Fixed head. 2 positions for insertion of actuator.

1.18 x 3.68 x 1.18 (30 x 93.5 x 30)

2.05 x 4.51 x 1.18 (52 x 114.5 x 30)

4.33 x 3.68 x 1.30 (110 x 93.5 x 33)

Centers: 0.79 x 0.87 or 1.59 Centers: 0.79 x 0.87 (20 x 22 or 40.3) (20 x 22) Without locking of actuator. Optional accessory: guard retaining device. Turret head: 8 positions for insertion of actuator.

Locking and unlocking of actuator by solenoid (either on energization or on de-energization). Turret head: 8 positions for insertion of actuator.

6

7

Safety contacts actuated by the actuator. Slow break with positive opening operation N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.C. + N.C. + N.O. auxiliary contact with positive opening operation, controlled by solenoid

N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.C.

N.C. + N.O. N.C.+N.O. (N.O. staggered) N.O. + N.C. make before break N.C. + N.C. N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. +N.O. N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered)

Screw clamp terminals. Tapped entry for n° 13 cable gland, tapped ISO M20 x 1.5 or tapped 1/2” NPT

Pre-cabled, 4 or 6 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2), L = 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft. (2, 5, or 10 m)

Screw clamp terminals. Tapped entry for n° 11 cable gland, tapped ISO M16 x 1.5 or tapped 1/2” NPT.

2 conduit entries

–

1 conduit entry

2 conduit entries

1 conduit entry

XCSL

XCS MP

XCSPA

XCSTA

XCS TE

3/40

3/44

3/26

N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.C.

N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) N.O. + N.C. make before break N.C. + N.C. + N.C. auxiliary contact with positive opening operation, controlled by solenoid

8

9

10

3/45

(1) Stopping time of machine less than time taken for operator to access hazardous zone. (2) Stopping time of machine greater than time taken for operator to access hazardous zone.

3/3

Selection guide (continued)

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches

Applications

1

Protection of operators by stopping the machine when the guard hinge rotates through 5°

$OOOLJKWLQGXVWULDOPDFKLQHV¿WWHGZLWKKLQJHGRUURWDU\ protective covers with small opening radius

$OOOLJKWLQGXVWULDOPDFKLQHV¿WWHGZLWKKLQJHGDFFHVV doors

Safety interlock switches with rotary lever operating head

Rotary shaft operated safety interlock switches

540093

Device

Protection of operators by stopping the machine when the operating lever (attached to hinged machine guard) is displaced by 5°

540094

540095

540092

2

3 Conformity to Products standards

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n°14, JIS C4520

4 Machine assemblies

5

6

IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088/ISO 14119, EN/ISO 12100

3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV

UL, CSA

Enclosure

Plastic

Degree of protection

IP 67

Dimensions Switch (w x h x d or Ø) inches (mm) Mounting

1.18 x 3.45 x 1.18 (30 x 87.5 x 30)

2.05 x 4.27 x 1.18 (52 x 108.4 x 30)

1.18 x 3.78 x 1.18 (30 x 96 x 30)

2.05 x 4.61 x 1.18 (52 x 117 x 30)

Centers: 0.79 x 0.87 (20 x 22)

Centers: 0.79 x 0.87 or 1.59 (20 x 22 or 40.3)

Centers: 0.79 x 0.87 (20 x 22)

Centers: 0.79 x 0.87 x 1.59 (20 x 22 or 40.3)

Features

W\SHVRIOHYHUVWUDLJKWRUHOERZHGÀXVKZLWKUHDURIVZLWFK  3 lever positions: to left, centered or to right Turret head: 4 positions.

Contact blocks or outputs

Slow break safety contacts with positive opening operation N.C. contacts open when lever displaced by more then 5°

7

N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered)

8 Connection

9

N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.C.

2 types of rotary shafts: length 1.18 or 3.15 in. (30 or 80 mm) Turret head: 4 positions.

N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered)

N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.C.

Tapped entry for n° 11 cable gland, tapped ISO M16 x 1.5 or tapped 1/2” NPT

Screw terminals

1 conduit entry

2 conduit entries

1 conduit entry

2 conduit entries

Pre-cabled

–

–

–

–

Connector

–

–

–

–

Type references

XCSPL

XCSTL

XCSPR

XCSTR

Page

3/52

10

3/4

Protection of operators by stopping the machine when the gate is opened

Protection of operators by stopping the machine when the gate is opened

$OOOLJKWLQGXVWULDOPDFKLQHV¿WWHGZLWKDFFHVVJDWHVZLWKLPSUHFLVHJXLGDQFHDQGRUVXEMHFWHGWRIUHTXHQW washing

All machines with quick rundown time

Non-contact safety interlocks, pre-cabled or with connector on pigtail

Limit switches

Non-contact safety interlock system

1

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14

107872-8-Q

540099

540098

540096

540097

525582

2

3

IEC 61508, EN/IEC 62601 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, (SIL 2 and SIL 3), CSA C22-2 n° 14 EN 13849-1 (Category 3 and 4), EN/IEC 60947-1, EN/IEC 60947-2, EN/IEC 60947-5-3

IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088/ISO 14119, EN/ISO 12100

EN 1088/ISO 14119

IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088/ISO 14119

UL, CSA BG combined with safety modules XPS AF, XPS DM, XPS MP

UL, CSA, TÜV

UL, CSA

Plastic

Plastic

Metal or plastic

IP 66 and IP 67 for pre-cabled version IP 67 for connector on pigtail version

IP 66, IP 67 and IP69K for pre-cabled version IP 67 for connector version

IP 66, IP 67 and IP 68

4

5

0.63 x 2 x 0.27 (16 x 51 x 7)

0.98 x 3.46 x 0.51 (25 x 88 x 13)

Ø 30, L 1.51 (Ø 30, L 38.5)

1.33 x 3.94 x 1.26 (34 x 100 x 32)

1.18 x 1.97 x0.62 (30 x 50 x 16)

0.63 (16)

3.07 (78)

–

3.23 (82)

0.79 (20)

1 approach direction

9 approach directions

Plunger or rotary head Head adjustable in 15° steps throughout 360°

3 approach directions

1.22 x 1.34 x 3.5 (31 x 34 x 89)

Independent Reed type contacts operated by coded magnet Self-contained system not Contacts change state from a distance of 0.31 in. (8mm) (0.20 in. (5 mm for XCSDMC) requiring use of safety module Must be used with a Preventa™ safety module or non-magnetic slim

N.C. contacts with positive opening operation

N.C. + N.O. (N.C. staggered) N.O. + N.O. (1 N.O. staggered)

N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) slow break N.C. + N.C. + N.O. and N.C. + N.C. + N.O. + N.O. snap action

N.C. + N.O. (N.C. staggered) N.O. + N.O. (1 N.O. staggered) N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (1 N.C. staggered) N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (1 N.O. staggered)

N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) N.O. + N.O. (1 N.O. staggered)

–

2 PNP type Solid-state outputs XCSDM4 : EDM function + 1 alarm output

–

XCSD and XCS P: tapped entry for Pg 13.5 cable gland, tapped ISO M20 x 1.5 or tapped 1/2” NPT

–

–

–

–

–

2 contacts: 4 x 23 AWG (0.25 mm2), L = 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft. (2, 5, or 10 m)

2 contacts: 4 x 22 AWG (0.25 mm2) 3 contacts: 6 x 23 AWG (0.25 mm2) L = 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft. (2, 5, or 10 m)

2 contacts: 4 x 22 AWG (0.25 mm2) L = 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft. (2, 5, or 10 m)

XCSDM3 : 6 x 23 AWG (0,25 mm2) XCSDM4 : 8 x 22 AWG (0,25 mm2) L = 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft. (2, 5, or 10 m)

XSC M: 7 x 21 AWG (0.5 mm2), or 9 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2), L = 3.3, 6.6, or 16.4 ft. (1, 2, or 5 m)

M8 on 0.15 m pigtail

M12 on 0.15 m pigtail

M12 on 0.15 m pigtail

M12 connector (A coding)

–

XCSDMC

XCSDMP

XCSDMR

;&6'0;&6'0

XCS M

;&6';&63

3/68

3/76

3/80

3/56

1 conduit entry

6

7

8

9

10

3/5

General

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches

1

2

Refer to standards (1,62DQG(1,62

Removable or moveable protective guards for potentially dangerous machine functions must be used in conjunction with locking or interlocking devices. Application requiring an interlocking device: high inertia (long rundown time) machines. An interlocking device must be used when the rundown time is greater than the time it takes for a person to reach the danger zone. This device ensures that the guard remains locked until the potentially dangerous movement has stopped.

Guard switches

7KHPHFKDQLFDODFWXDWRUJXDUGVZLWFKHVLHVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHV VSHFL¿FDOO\ designed for machine guarding applications, provide an ideal solution for the locking or interlocking of movable guards associated with industrial machinery. They meet the requirements of standards EN/ISO 12100, EN 294/ISO 13852, EN 1088/ISO 14119 and IEC/EN 60204-1. They contribute to the protection of operators working on potentially dangerous machines by breaking the start control circuit of the machine when a protective guard is opened or removed, using positive opening operation contacts, thus stopping the dangerous movement of the machine. The removal/opening of the guard (after the dangerous movement has stopped) can either be: - at the time the machine is switched-off for low inertia machines (machines where the rundown time is less than the time it takes for the operator to access the hazardous zone), or - delayed for high inertia machines (machines where the rundown time is greater than the time it takes for the operator to access the hazardous zone).

Control circuit categories

Guard switches used in conjunction with a Preventa™ safety module enable designers, with reference to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1, to establish category 4 control systems. Safety related parts of control systems should be developed taking into account the results of an appropriate Risk Assessment (EN 1050/ISO 14121 - EN/ISO 12100 - 1 and 2).

Safety of personnel

The start command for the machine can only be initiated following correct operation of the guard switch. On its release, the N.C. safety contacts are opened by positive action or, for non-contact safety interlocks, change state (must be monitored using a Preventa™ safety relay module).

Safety of operation

Guard switches incorporate slow break or snap action contacts with positive opening operation (except for non-contact safety interlocks where this is not possible). For mechanical actuator guard switches, on closing of the guard the DFWXDWRU¿WWHGWRLWHQWHUVWKHKHDGRIWKHVZLWFKRSHUDWHVWKHPXOWLSOHLQWHUORFN device and closes the N.C. contacts. For non-contact safety interlocks, the presence of the magnet causes the contacts to change state.

Safety in use

All guard switches are designed to accept a few millimetres of misalignment between the actuator and the switch in order to compensate for mechanical play, vibration, etc.

Design to minimize defeat

Both mechanically and magnetically actuated guard switches are designed to be RSHUDWHGE\VSHFL¿FDFWXDWRUVVRWKDWWKH\FDQQRWEHGHIHDWHGLQDVLPSOHPDQQHU using common tools, rods, metal plates, simple magnets, etc. When loosening the mounting screws for re-orientation of the turret head on mechanical actuator guard switches, the head itself remains attached to the switch body and the contact states remain unchanged. All guard switches and safety limit switches are designed in such a manner that it is virtually impossible to adjust the head setting, remove the switch or gain access to the contacts without using the appropriate tool. 7KHUHDUHYDULRXVPHWKRGVIRUREWDLQLQJDKLJKHUOHYHORIWDPSHUSURR¿QJIRUH[DPSOH - using a cage device to prevent the insertion of a spare actuator or magnet, or any other foreign body, - mounting the actuator or coded magnet to the guard by means that make it very GLI¿FXOWWRUHPRYHULYHWLQJRUZHOGLQJ 

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3/6

Presentation

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches

Metal safety interlock switches with mechanical actuator

Without locking of actuator Metal safety interlock switches for use on machines with low inertia and operating in normal conditions (no vibration or shock and guard mounted vertically, without risk of rebound on closing), thus eliminating unintentional opening of the guard.

With locking of actuator and manual unlocking Metal safety interlock switches for use on heavy machines with low inertia and operating in arduous conditions (shock or vibration exist), whereby the guard could open unintentionally. A key operated lock or a pushbutton enables the positive locking of the guard and its subsequent unlocking. With interlocking and locking of actuator by solenoid Metal safety interlock switches for use on machines with high inertia or necessitating a controlled opening of the protective guard. The locking of the moving guard can either be on de-energization or energization of the solenoid. A key operated lock enables manual unlocking of the guard in the event of an interlocking circuit malfunction, and also provides extra safety for maintenance personnel likely to be working on the machine. The switches incorporate 2 LEDs: one indicating guard “open/closed” and the other, guard “locked/ unlocked”.

Plastic safety interlock switches with mechanical actuator

Without locking of actuator Plastic safety interlock switches for use on light machines with low inertia. For use in arduous conditions (shock or vibration exist, guard not vertical or risk of rebound on closing) where the guard could open unintentionally, a guard retaining device (XCSPA or XCSTA) is available as an accessory.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 With interlocking and locking of actuator by solenoid Plastic safety interlock switches for use on machines with high inertia or necessitating a controlled opening of the protective guard. The locking of the moving guard can either be on de-energization or energization of the solenoid. A special tool enables manual unlocking of the guard in the event of an interlocking circuit malfunction, and also provides extra safety for maintenance personnel likely to be working on the machine.

8

9

10

3/7

Presentation

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, safety limit switches and non-contact safety interlock systems

1

Rotary lever and rotary shaft operated guard switches for hinged guards

With head for rotary movement (lever or rotary shaft) Plastic safety interlock switches with straight or elbowed operating lever or rotary shaft operator. 6SHFL¿FDOO\GHVLJQHGIRUVPDOOLQGXVWULDOPDFKLQHV ¿WWHGZLWKVPDOOVL]HGhinged doors, covers or protective guards. They protect the operator by stopping the dangerous movement of the machine as soon as the rotary lever or rotary shaft displacement reaches an angle of 5°.

Safety limit switches

With head for linear movement (plunger) or rotary movement (lever) Metal or plastic limit switches. For use on machines with low inertia and also on machines with high inertia, when used in conjunction with actuator operated guard switches, for monitoring access doors and/or guards. When used on their own, they are always installed in “positive mode” or combined in pairs, with one switch being in “positive mode” and the other in “negative mode”.

Non-contact safety interlocks

With an associated coded magnet Plastic case guard switches for use on machines with low inertia. 6SHFL¿FDOO\GHVLJQHGIRULQGXVWULDOPDFKLQHV¿WWHG with doors, covers or guards with imprecise guiding. They are ideally suited for machines subjected to frequent washing or liquid spray. They protect the operator by immediately stopping any dangerous movement, as soon as the distance between the switch and its magnet is greater than 0.31 or 0.20 in (8 or 5 mm), depending on the switch model.

Non-contact safety interlock systems

With dedicated transmitter

2

3

4

5

6

7

Plastic case system for use on machines with low inertia. 6SHFL¿FDOO\GHVLJQHGIRULQGXVWULDOPDFKLQHV¿WWHG with one or more doors, covers or guards with imprecise guiding. They are ideally suited for machines subjected to frequent washing or liquid spray and that are not necessarily equipped with an enclosure or control cabinet. These self-contained category 3 (SIL 2) or 4 (SIL 3) (per IEC 61508 and EN/IEC 62061) systems protect the operator by stopping any dangerous movement, as soon as the distance between the transmitter and receiver is greater than 0.39 in. (10 mm).

8

9

10

3/8

Presentation

Safety detection solutions Metal safety interlock switches

Actuating keys

The actuating keys are common to all XCSA, XCSB, XCSC and XCSE

Play Play 10°

10°

Their oblong mounting holes enable simple adjustment when mounting on moving guards. A pivoting actuator (both horizontally and vertically) is available when using guard switches in conjunction with hinged guards or guards with imprecise guiding. Straight actuators are supplied with an adaptor shank for simple replacement of an XCK J guard switch by an XCS switch, without the need to drill additional mounting holes for the switch or actuator.

Play

$OO;&6$;&6%;&6&DQG;&6(DUH¿WWHGZLWKDVTXDUHWXUUHWKHDGZKLFK can be rotated through 360° in 90° steps 8 directions of actuation are possible for the actuating key: - 4 in the horizontal plane, - 4 from above the switch (4 alternative positions of the actuator slot, depending on the orientation of the head). When loosening the mounting screw for re-orientation of the operating head, the head itself remains attached to the body and the contact states remain unchanged.

33 34

4

5

6

7

31

14

13

13 14

21 22

32

32

11 12

22

LED indicators

31

21 22

XCSA, XCSB, XCSC and XCSE incorporate a 3-pole contact block with positive opening operation, which is actuated by insertion or withdrawal of the actuating key attached to the guard. The withdrawal of the actuating key opens the N.C. safety contact(s), even in the event of the contact sticking or welding. The 3-pole contact block enables redundant safety circuits to be established (for example: N.C. + N.C. or N.C. + N.O.) and also, to provide signalling (for example: PLC, illuminated beacon, etc.).

21

Safety contacts

2

3

Play

Turret head

1

8

An orange LED (optional for type XCSA, XCSB and XCSC, standard for type XCSE) indicates the position of the machine guard: LED illuminated: actuating key not inserted in head of switch, N.C. contact(s) open, guard open. LED not illuminated: actuating key inserted in head of switch, N.C. contact(s) closed, guard closed. A green LED (incorporated on type XCSE) indicates the locking of the machine guard: LED not illuminated: actuating key not inserted in head of switch: the machine cannot be operated, LED illuminated: actuating key inserted in head of switch and actuating key locked. The machine is either ready for starting, running or decelerating to a standstill.

3/9

9

10

Presentation

Safety detection solutions Metal safety interlock switches

1

0DQXDOORFNLQJXQORFNLQJE\ pushbutton or key operated lock on XCSB and XCSC

7KHSXVKEXWWRQRUNH\RSHUDWHGORFN¿WWHGWRW\SH;&6%DQG;&6&DOORZV PDQXDOORFNLQJXQORFNLQJRIWKHPDFKLQHJXDUG Their use is not necessary for the normal operation of the guard switch. For ease of access, the pushbutton or lock may be mounted on the right or the left of the guard switch head. For type XCSC, when the machine guard is locked (key in position “LOCK”), the resistance to forcible withdrawal of the DFWXDWRU¿WWHGWRWKHJXDUGLV 337 lbs. (1500 N). The key is removable from the locking device in the “LOCK” position.

/RFNLQJXQORFNLQJE\VROHQRLGRQ XCSE

7\SH;&6(LQFRUSRUDWHDVROHQRLGIRUORFNLQJXQORFNLQJRIWKHPDFKLQH guard With the machine guard closed and locked, the resistance to forcible withdrawal of the DFWXDWRU¿WWHGWRWKHJXDUGLV 450 lbs. (2000 N).

2

3

4

In addition to the 3-pole contact block, positively operated by the actuating key mounted to the guard, XCSE guard switches incorporate a 1&12RU N.C. + N.C. contact block mechanically linked to the solenoid. The N.C. contact(s) are for use in the safety circuit of the machine and the N.O. contact for signalling the status of the solenoid.

5

6 Key operated lock on XCSE

7\SH;&6(DUH¿WWHGZLWKDNH\RSHUDWHGORFNDOORZLQJWKHXQORFNLQJRIWKH machine guard while being held in the lock position by the solenoid (for use by authorized personnel only)

7

8 K

LOC OCK

UNL

9

10

3/10

The manual unlocking of the guard using the key operated lock is useful in the following cases: - while the machine is undergoing maintenance (with the key turned to the “UNLOCK” position and then removed, the level of protection is higher in preventing an accidental machine start. The safety for maintenance personnel is thus improved), - in the event of a power failure, - in the event of an interlocking circuit malfunction (interlocked condition maintained: positive safety). The electrical supply providing the unlocking via the solenoid always takes priority over manual unlocking using the key operated lock. 7KHORFN¿WWHGWRVWDQGDUGJXDUG switches has key withdrawal from the “LOCK” and “UNLOCK” positions.

Presentation

Safety detection solutions Metal safety interlock switches type XCSE

Example of operation for an XCSE safety interlock switch: locking without power Actuating key locks into the switch when inserted. This is typically preferred as the door is secured, regardless of electrical power availability or power failure. Applying power to the electromagnet will unlock the actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. The N.C. Safety contacts will not open until the actuating key is removed.

Locked

Free

“O” (de-energized)

“1” (energized)

“1” (energized)

“O” (de-energized)

“O” (de-energized)

“1” (energized)

33

21

33

21

33

21

33

21

33

21

14

34

22

14

34

22

14

34

22

14

34

22

14

34

22

14

34

31

13

21

31

13

21

31

13

21

31

13

21

31

13

21

31

13

32

14

22

32

14

22

32

14

22

32

14

22

32

14

22

32

14

21 22

21 22

13

Locked

4

43

51

43

51

43

51

43

51

43

51

52

44

52

44

52

44

52

44

52

Machine has stopped. The guard can be opened.

44

Stop instruction given, the machine stops gradually (deceleration then complete stop of motor).

51

Guard closed, Start instruction actuating key can given, the machine be locked. It will be is running. locked as soon as the start instruction is given.

52

Contact states 1&12 RI solenoid

Machine cannot be operated.

43

Machine in a non-operational state.

2

3

33

Solenoid status

Status

Free

13

Free

3-pole contact state for XCSE7ppp

Machine stopped, power on Closed

13

Free

3-pole contact state for XCSE5ppp

Closed

Stopping sequence Closed

13

Guard status

13

Machine stopped, ready to start Closed

13

Power on, machine off Open

Machine running

Guard position

Power off, machine off Open

44

Machine status

1

5

6

2UDQJH/('

Green LED

7 Safety circuit of the machine

Open

Open

Open

Closed

Closed

Open

8

9

10

3/11

Presentation

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches type XCSE

Example of operation for an XCSE safety interlock switch: locking with power

“0” (de-energized)

7

Green LED

Safety circuit of the machine

8

9

10

3/12

Open

Open

Open

Closed

Closed

14

32

14

31

13

34

21 22

21 22

2UDQJH/('

Open

43

51 52

51 52

Machine has stopped. The guard can be opened.

44

13 14

34

21

14

31 32

22

21 22

13 14

51 52

43

31 32 43 44

51 52

Stop instruction given, the machine stops gradually (deceleration then complete stop of motor).

44

21 22

34

14

21

13 14

22

14

31 32

34

21 22

21 22

Guard closed, Start instruction actuating key can given, the machine be locked. It will be is running. locked as soon as the start instruction is given.

13

“1” (energized)

33

“1” (energized)

33

“0” (de-energized)

13

Free

43

13 14 51

Locked

44

14

31 32

34

21 22

52

13 14

21

31 32

22 43

Machine cannot be operated.

44

21 22

51

Contact states of Electromagnet

Machine in a non-operational state.

52

6

Status

Locked

33

“0” (de-energized)

43

5

Free

13

“0” (de-energized)

3-pole contact state for XCSE7ppp

Machine Stopped, Power On Closed

13

Electromagnet state 3-pole contact state for XCSE5ppp

44

4

Closed

Stopping sequence Closed

33

Free

13

Free

33

Guard status

13

Machine Stopped, Ready to Start Closed

33

Power On, Machine Off Open

Machine running

Guard position

Power Off, Machine Off Open

14

Machine status

22

3

Note: Locking with power devices does not meet European standards regarding the safety of machinery, especially EN 1088 regarding guard locking. European standards do not allow a “locking with power” function for gate or door guarding/locking. Locking without power devices meet European requirements, and should be used when machinery is to be shipped to Europe or where machinery must meet European standards.

34

2

Actuating key is locked into switch only when actuating key is inserted and power is applied to the electromagnet. Door or guard is not locked in the event of a power failure or when power is removed from the electromagnet. Removing power to the electromagnet will unlock the actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. The N.C. safety contacts will not open until the actuating key is removed.

21

1

Presentation

Safety detection solutions XCSL safety interlock switches type XCSL

([DPSOHRI2SHUDWLRQIRUDQ;&6/6DIHW\,QWHUORFN6ZLWFK/RFNLQJ:LWKRXW3RZHU Actuating key locks into the switch when inserted. This is typically preferred as the door is secured, regardless of electrical power availability or power failure. Applying power to the electromagnet will unlock the actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. Applying power to the electromagnet will open the N.C. safety contacts as well.

Status

Machine cannot be started.

Stop instruction is given, the machine stops gradually (deceleration then complete stop of motor).

Machine has stopped. The guard can be opened.

3

4

5

2UDQJH/('

Safety circuit of the machine

2

33

13 14

13 14

34

31 32

22

21 22

34

13 14

14

31 32

22

21 22

34

13 14

14

31 32

22

21 22

14

13 14

34

31

22

21

32

Guard is closed, Start instruction is actuating key can given, the machine be locked. It will be is running. locked as soon as the start instruction is given.

21

“1” (energized)

33

“0” (de-energized) 13

“0” (de-energized)

21

“1” (energized)

33

Free Movement

13

Locked

21

Locked

13

Free Movement

22

14

13 14

34

31 32

22

21 22

13 14

14

31 32

34

21 22

Machine is in non-operational state.

Machine Stopped, Power On Closed

33

“1” (energized)

3-pole contact state for XCSL7ppp

Closed

Stopping sequence Closed

21

“0” (de-energized)

13

Electromagnet state 3-pole contact state for XCSL5ppp

33

Free Movement

21

Free Movement

13

Guard status

33

Machine Stopped, Ready to Start Closed

21

Power On, Machine Off Open

Machine running

Guard position

Power Off, Machine Off Open

22

Machine status

1

Open

Open

Open

Closed

Closed

Open

6

7

8

9

10

3/13

Presentation

Safety detection solutions XCSL safety interlock switches type XCSL

Example of operation for an XCSL safety interlock switch: locking with power

5

8

9

10

3/14

33 34

13 14

Machine cannot be operated.

Guard closed, Start instruction actuating key can given, the machine be locked. It will be is running. locked as soon as the start instruction is given.

Stop instruction given, the machine stops gradually (deceleration then complete stop of motor).

Machine has stopped. The guard can be opened.

Open

Open

Open

Closed

Open

6

7

13

Machine in a non-operational state.

2UDQJH/('

Safety circuit of the machine

14

31 32

22

21 22

14

13 14

34

31 32

22

21 22

34

13 14

14

31 32

22

21 22

34

13 14

14

31 32

22

21

21

“0” (de-energized)

13

“1” (energized) 33

“1” (energized)

21

“0” (de-energized)

33

Free Movement

13

Locked

22

34

13 14

14

31 32

22

21

13 14

22

31 32

34

21

Locked

21

“0” (de-energized)

Status

Free Movement

33

“0” (de-energized)

3-pole contact state for XCSL7ppp

Machine stopped, Power On Closed

13

Electromagnet state 3-pole contact state for XCSL5ppp

22

4

Closed

Stopping sequence Closed

21

Free Movement

33

Free Movement

13

Guard status

21

Machine Stopped, Ready to Start Closed

33

Power On, Machine Off Open

Machine running

Guard position

Power Off, Machine Off Open

13

Machine status

22

3

Note: Locking with power devices does not meet European standards regarding the safety of machinery, especially EN 1088 regarding guard locking. European standards do not allow a “locking with power” function for gate or door guarding/locking. Locking without power devices meet European requirements, and should be used when machinery is to be shipped to Europe or where machinery must meet European standards.

14

2

Actuating key is locked into switch only when actuating key is inserted and power is applied to the electromagnet. Door or guard is not locked in the event of a power failure or when power is removed from the electromagnet. Removing power to the electromagnet will unlock the actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. Removing power to the electromagnet will open the N.C. safety contacts as well.

21

1

Closed

Presentation

Safety detection solutions Plastic safety interlock switches

Actuating keys

The actuating keys are common to all plastic XCSP and XCST switches Their oblong mounting holes enable simple adjustment when mounting on moving guards. Play

A pivoting actuator (both horizontally and vertically) is available when using guard switches in conjunction with hinged guards or guards with imprecise guiding.

Play 10°

1

10°

Straight actuating keys are supplied with an adaptor for simple replacement of an XCKP guard switch by an XCSPA switch, or an XCKT switch by an XCSTA switch, without the need to drill additional mounting holes for the switch or the actuating key.

Play

2

Play

Turret head

6DIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHV;&63$;&67$DQG;&67(DUH¿WWHGZLWKDVTXDUHWXUUHWKHDGZKLFKFDQEH URWDWHGWKURXJKƒLQƒVWHSV*XDUGVZLWFKHV;&603KDYHD¿[HGKHDG 8 directions of actuation are possible for the actuator: - 4 in the horizontal plane (1 for XCS MP), - 4 from above the switch (1 for XCS MP) (4 alternative positions of the actuator slot, depending on the orientation of the head).

3

4

When loosening the 2 mounting screws for reorientation of the operating head, the head itself remains attached to the body and the contact states remain unchanged (XCSPA, XCSTA, XCS TE).

Safety contacts

5

The guard switches incorporate either a 2-pole contact block (XCS MP, XCSPA and XCS TE) or a 3-pole contact block (XCSMP and XCSTA), with positive opening operation, which is actuated by insertion or withdrawal of the actuating key attached to the guard 21

11 12

14

22

22

13

21

21

14

22

13

21 22

14

13

XCSPA, XCS TE

21

13

33

21

31

13

11

21

31

22

14

34

22

32

14

12

22

32

XCSTA

OG

BN BN/WH

OG/WH

BU BU/WH

OG OG/WH

BN BN/WH

BU BU/WH

OG OG/WH

OG

BU BU/WH

BU/WH

Guard retaining device

OG/WH

BU

or XCS MP

In addition, guard switches type XCS TE incorporate a N.C. contact block (with positive opening operation) actuated by the solenoid. The N.C. contact is for use in the safety circuit of the machine. The withdrawal of the actuating key opens the N.C. safety contact(s), even in the event of the contact sticking or welding. The 2-pole N.C. + N.C. or 3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. or N.C. + N.C. + N.C. (XCSTA/MP only) contact block enables category 3 control circuits to be established conforming to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1 by using both N.C. safety contacts in redundancy, or a category 1 control circuit by using one N.C. contact in the safety circuit and the other N.C. contact for signalling (for example: PLC, illuminated beacon, etc.). Alternatively, these guard switches used in conjunction with a Preventa™ XPS safety relay module establish a category 4 control circuit. Designers should follow the relevant recommendations for validation of control systems.

The guard retaining device XCS Z21 can be used with all plastic switches type XCSPA and XCSTA that DUHXVHGLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKHLWKHUWKHZLGH;&6= RUSLYRWLQJ;&6= DFWXDWLQJNH\ It assists in holding the guard closed by providing an extra retaining force of 11.2 lbs. (50 N).

6

7

8

9

It is specially suited for use with light machines operating in arduous conditions (vibration, mechanical shock, guard not vertical, risk of guard rebound on closing, etc.). It can be used for horizontal actuator actuation directions as well as those from above.

10

3/15

Presentation

Safety detection solutions Plastic safety interlock switches

1

2

/RFNLQJXQORFNLQJ by solenoid on XCS TE

7\SH;&67(LQFRUSRUDWHDVROHQRLGIRUORFNLQJXQORFNLQJRIWKHPDFKLQHJXDUG

Unlocking by special tool for XCS TE

Type XCS TE are supplied with a special tool 1 that enables unlocking of the machine guard while being held in the locked position by the solenoid (for use by authorized personnel only)

With the machine guard closed and locked, the resistance to forcible withdrawal of WKHDFWXDWRU¿WWHGWRWKHJXDUGLV112 lbs. (500 N). In addition to the 2-pole contact block, positively operated by the actuator mounted to the guard, XCS TE switches incorporate a N.C. contact block mechanically linked to the solenoid. The N.C. contact is for use in the safety circuit of the machine.

The manual unlocking of the guard using the tool 1 is useful in the following cases: - while the machine is undergoing maintenance (with the tool turned to the “UNLOCK” position and then removed, the level of protection is higher in preventing an accidental machine start. The safety for maintenance personnel is thus improved), - in the event of a power failure, - in the event of an interlocking circuit malfunction (interlocked condition maintained: positive safety). The electrical supply providing the unlocking via the solenoid always takes priority over manual unlocking using the special tool.

1

3 UNLOCK

4

Example of operation for an XCS TE safety interlock switch: locking without power Actuating key locks into switch when inserted. This is typically preferred as the door is secured regardless of electrical power availability or failure. Applying power to the electromagnet will unlock actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. The N.C. safety contacts will not open until the actuating key is removed.

8

Safety circuit of the Open machine

9

10

3/16

Open

Closed

13 14

11 12

22

21 22

14

21 22

11

21

12

22

31

32

Closed

32

11 12

31 32

32

Open

Stop instruction given, Machine has stopped. the machine stops The guard can be gradually (deceleration opened. then complete stop of motor). 31

14

21 22

21 22

14

11 12

22

21 22

Guard closed, actuating Start instruction given, key can be locked. It will the machine is be locked as soon as running. the start instruction is given.

21

“1” (energized)

13

Free

“O” (de-energized)

13

Locked

“O” (de-energized)

13

Locked

“1” (energized)

31

14 11

22 21

12

Machine cannot be operated.

32

Contact state of solenoid

22

14

21 22

Machine is in non-operational state.

Free

31

Status

Machine stopped, power on Closed

32

7

11

2-pole contact state for XCS TE7ppp

21

2-pole contact state for XCS TE5ppp

Closed

Stopping sequence Closed

21

“1” (energized) 13

Free

“O” (de-energized)

21

Free

Solenoid status

13

Guard status

12

6

Machine stopped, ready to start Closed

Running

Guard position

Power on, machine off Open

22

5

Power off, machine off Open

31

Machine status

Open

Presentation

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches Type XCSTE

Example of operation for an XCS TE safety interlock switch: locking with power The actuating key is locked into switch only when the actuating key is inserted and power is applied to the electromagnet. The door or guard is not locked in the event of a power failure or when power is removed from the electromagnet. Removing power to the electromagnet will unlock the actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. The N.C. safety contacts will not open until the actuating key is removed. Note: Locking with power devices does not meet European standards regarding the safety of machinery, especially EN 1088 regarding guard locking. European standards do not allow a “locking with power” function for gate or door guarding/locking. Locking without power devices meets European requirements, and should be used when machinery is to be shipped to Europe or where machinery must meet European standards.

Open

Open

Closed

22

14

21

11

13

3

4

12

22

14

21 22

11 12

21 22

33

34

Closed

5

34

11 12

33 34

34

Open

2

Stop instruction given, Machine has stopped. the machine stops The guard can be gradually (deceleration opened. then complete stop of motor). 33

14

21 22

21 22

14

11 12

22

21 22

Guard closed, actuating Start instruction given, key can be locked. It will the machine is be locked as soon as running. the start instruction is given.

21

“0” (de-energized)

13

Free Movement

“1” (energized)

33

14 11 12

22 21 22

34

Safety circuit of the machine

Locked

“1” (energized)

34

33

Contact state of Electromagnet

Machine cannot be operated.

Locked

“0” (de-energized)

33

21

14 11 12

22 21

Machine is in non-operational state.

Free Movement

13

“0” (de-energized)

Status

Machine Stopped, Power On Closed

13

Free Movement

“0” (de-energized)

2-pole contact state for XCS TE7ppp

Closed

Stopping Sequence Closed

21

Free Movement

Electromagnet State 2-pole contact state for XCS TE5ppp

13

Guard Status

21

Machine Stopped, Ready to Start Closed

13

Power On, Machine Off Open

Machine running

Guard Position

Power Off, Machine Off Open

22

Machine Status

1

Open

6

7

8

9

10

3/17

Presentation

Safety detection solutions Rotary lever and rotary shaft operated safety interlock switches

Presentation

Turret head Safety interlock switches for hinged covers or guards, featuring a hinged lever or rotary shaft operator, incorporate a turret head that can be rotated through 360° in 90° steps. Two additional self-locking screws are included with each switch for positive mounting of the head.

1

2 2 types of body b Plastic body, narrow, with 1 conduit entry for XCSPL and XCSPR. b Plastic body, wide, with 2 conduit entries for XCSTL and XCSTR.

3

4 XCSPL

Applications

9

10

3/18

21

13 14

22

31 32

11 12

21

22

22

13

33

14

34

21

7

22

14

13

6

21

2 types of operating lever, 2 rotary shaft lengths b Levers 6WUDLJKWRUHOERZHGÀXVKZLWKUHDURIVZLWFK PDNLQJWKHOHYHU switches suitable for use with all types of hinged guards, whether: - ÀXVKZLWKWKHPDFKLQHIUDPHZRUNXVHDVZLWFKZLWKDQHOERZHG ÀXVKOHYHU  - overhanging in relation to the machine framework (use a switch with a straight lever). 3 alternative operating lever positions allow the switches to be used with guards that open to the left, center or right. b Rotary shaft operators 2 shaft lengths: 1.18 or 3.15 in. (30 or 80 mm). Safety contacts Types XCSPL and XCSPR incorporate a 2-pole contact block, with positive opening operation. The contact arrangements can be: N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) or N.C. + N.C. Types XCSTL and XCSTR incorporate a 3-pole contact, with positive opening operation. The contact arrangements can be: N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O. staggered) or N.C. + N.C. + N.O.) (N.O. staggered). Opening of the N.C. safety contact(s) occurs when the operating lever or spindle is displaced by an angle equal to or greater than 5°.

5

8

XCSTR

These safety interlock switches provide a solution for monitoring hinged protective guards with small opening radius on machines with low inertia (no rundown time). They are specially suitable for existing machines which need to be brought in-line with the latest standards and directives since they can be used in conjunction with existing covers, including those whose mounting is somewhat imprecise. Mounting of these switches improve the machine operator’s level of safety by limiting the opening of the protective guard and reducing the risk of touching any moving parts before they have come to a stop.

Presentation

Safety detection solutions Non-contact safety interlocks and systems

Presentation

Non-contact safety interlocks

3 body types b b b b b b

PBT plastic body Compact rectangular, XCSDMC Standard rectangular, XCSDMP Cylindrical Ø 30, XCSDMR Pre-cabled, length 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft. (2, 5, or 10 m) Connector on pigtail connection: - M8: DMC - M12: DMP, DMR

Contacts 1RQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVDUH¿WWHGZLWKSROH ;&6'0&;&6'05;&6'03 or 3-pole (XCSDMP) Reed type contacts and are available with or without a “guard closed” LED indicator. The N.C. and N.O. contacts change state as soon as the magnet is at a distance from the sensor of approximately 0.31 in. (8 mm) for types XCSDMP and XCSDMR and approximately 0.20 in. (5mm) for type XCSDMC. Connection When used in safety circuits, the Reed technology contacts must always be used in conjunction with a Preventa™ safety module. Non-contact safety interlock systems with dedicated transmitter

1

2

3

4

1 body type b PBT plastic body b Self-contained range: category 3 and SIL 2 XCSDM3 and category 4 and SIL 3 - XCSDM4 (SIL 2 and SIL 3 per IEC 61508 and EN/IEC 62061) b Pre-cabled, length 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft. (2, 5, or 10 m) b Pigtail with M12 connector Technology Coded “Hall effect” detection PNP safety outputs Integrated self-monitoring using micro-processors. Detection distance from 0 to 0.39 in. (0 to 10 mm) obtained on approach of dedicated transmitter XCSDMT. Functions b Dynamic EDM (External Device Monitoring) only for XCSDM4, b Fault and short-circuit detection, b Output diagnostics (non safety related) only for XCSDM4 b LED indicator b Series wiring of up to a maximum of 32 systems for XCSDM3 only.

Applications These switches provide a solution for monitoring moveable machine guards on machines with quick rundown times. They are particularly suitable for guards without DFFXUDWHJXLGDQFHDQGIRUXVHLQGLI¿FXOWHQYLURQPHQWV (dust, liquids, etc.). Installing self-contained systems provides an optimum solution (no control system required). They enable - monitoring of one or several guards (opening, closing) on small machines, - savings in space and the elimination of enclosures and/or control cabinets.

3/19

5

6

7

8

9

10

Presentation

Safety detection solutions Safety limit switches

Presentation

1

With head for linear movement (plunger) or rotary movement (lever) b Narrow metal body. b Compact XCS M b With protective cover, preventing both access to the mounting screws or adjustment of the head by non authorized personnel. b Torx mounting screws. b A removable cable entry to facilitate wiring.

2 Contacts XCS M3OLPLWVZLWFKHVDUH¿WWHGZLWKSROHFRQWDFWV and XCS M4VZLWFKHVDUH¿WWHGZLWKSROHFRQWDFWV 4 versions of complete switches are available incorporating these contacts: - metal end plunger, - roller plunger, - thermoplastic roller lever, - 0.75 in. (19 mm) diameter steel roller lever.

3

4

Connection Pre-cabled switches, either 7 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm²) or 9 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm²).

Applications

5

These switches provide a solution for monitoring covers, guards or grilles on machines with low inertia (quick rundown time), either in conjunction with actuator operated guard switches or not. When used on their own, they are always installed in “positive mode” or combined in pairs, with one switch being in “positive mode” and the other in “negative mode”, and can, when connected to Preventa™ safety relay modules, establish a category 4 safety control system.

6

7

XPS

8

9

10

3/20

Presentation

Safety detection solutions Safety limit switches

Presentation

With head for linear movement (plunger) or rotary movement (lever) b Compact metal case XCSD and plastic body XCS P. b With protective cover, preventing both access to the mounting screws or adjustment of the head by non authorized personnel. b Torx mounting screws. b A removable cable entry to facilitate wiring. Contacts XCS P3pppp and XCSD3ppppOLPLWVZLWFKHVDUH¿WWHG with 3-pole contacts. 4 versions of complete switches are available incorporating these contacts: - metal end plunger, - roller plunger, - thermoplastic roller lever, - 0.75 in. (19 mm) diameter steel roller lever.

Applications

These switches provide a solution for monitoring covers, guards or grilles on machines with low inertia (quick rundown time), either in conjunction with actuator operated guard switches or not. When used on their own, they are always installed in “positive mode” or combined in pairs, with one switch being in “positive mode” and the other in “negative mode”, and can, when connected to Preventa™ safety relay modules, establish a category 4 safety control system.

1

2

3

4

5 XPS

Application information for all guard switches

2SHUDWLRQRI solenoid locking

6

Application information for all safety interlock and safety limit switches When designing a door or gate guarding system, these guidelines must be followed: b The actuating key, coded magnet or lever alone must not be used as the sole means to hold the gate or guard closed. A separate locking or latching mechanism must be used to hold the door closed. b The safety interlock switch or safety limit switch must not be used as a mechanical stop for the moving guard. A separate mechanical stop must be provided. (EN 1088 - 1995: 5.2.2) b The actuating key must not be used as a gate guiding device. Install a guide for the guard to ensure proper alignment. b Actuating keys must be securely attached to gates, guards, and doors only. They should not be attached to cables, cords or chains. b Actuating keys for safety interlocks should not be inserted further than the maximum depth indicated for that device. b Levers or plungers on safety limit switches should not be operated in excess of the parameters indicated for maximum travel. b Non-Contact safety interlock switches or actuating keys should not be used as a mechanical stop. Their operation is to be non-contact.

7

8

2SHUDWLRQRIVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHVZLWKVROHQRLGORFNLQJ Safety interlocks are available with two types of locking of the actuating key: locking with power and locking without power. The operation of each is described below. b Locking Without Power. Actuating key locks into switch when inserted. This is typically preferred as the door is secured regardless of electrical power availability or power failure. Applying power to the electromagnet will unlock actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. The N.C. safety contacts will not open until the actuating key is removed. b Locking With Power. Actuating key locks into switch only when actuating key is inserted and power is applied to the electromagnet. Door or guard is not locked in the event of a power failure or when power is removed from the electro-magnet. Removing power from the electromagnet will unlock actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. The N.C. safety contacts will not open until the actuating key is removed. Note: Locking with power devices do not meet European standards regarding the safety of machinery, especially EN 1088 regarding guard locking. European standards do not allow a “locking with power” function for gate or door guarding/locking. Locking without power devices meets European requirements, and should be used when machinery is to be shipped to Europe or where machinery must meet European standards. 3/21

9

10

Presentation

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Metal, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC, XCSE and XCSL Plastic, double insulated, turret head, types XCSMP, XCSPA, XCSTA and XCSTE

1

Metal, types XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSE

Safety interlock switches with or without locking of the actuating key

2

3

Pages 3/24 to 3/43

Plastic, types XCS MP, XCSPA XCSTA, XCS TE

Safety interlock switches with or without locking of the actuating key

4

5 Pages 3/44 to 3/49

6

Environment characteristics Safety interlock switch type Conformity to standards

7

3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV Protective treatment Ambient air temperature

Products Machine assemblies

For operation

For storage

8

Vibration resistance Shock resistance Electric shock protection Degree of protection Cable entry

Connecting cable

9

Materials

10

3/22

XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSE, XCSL XCS MP, XCSPA, XCSTA, XCS TE (metal) (plastic) IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088/ISO 14119, EN/ISO 12100 UL, CSA UL, CSA (c UL for XCS MP) Standard version: “TC” - 13…+ 158 °F (- 25…+ 70 °C) - 13…+ 104 °F (- 25…+ 40 °C) for XCSE - 13…+ 140 °F (- 25…+ 60 °C) for XCS TE - 40…+ 158 °F (- 40…+ 70 °C) - 13…+ 176 °F (- 25…+ 80 °C) for XCS MP 5 gn (10…500 Hz) conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (6 gn (10…55 Hz) for XCS MP) 10 gn (duration 11 ms) conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 (50 gn (duration 11 ms) for XCS MP) Class I conforming to IEC/EN 60536 Class 2 conforming to IEC/EN 60536 ,3FRQIRUPLQJWR,(&(1DQG,(&(1 (1) 1 entry (XCS A, XCS B, XCS C) or 2 entries 1 entry (XCSPA and XCS TE) or 2 entries (XCSE) tapped for n° 13 (Pg 13.5) cable gland, (XCSTA) tapped for n° 11 (Pg 11) cable gland, tapped M20 or tapped 1/2" NPT tapped M16 or tapped 1/2" NPT (with adaptor) for XCSTA and XCS TE – Pre-cabled, either 4 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) or 6 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) (XCS MP) XCS A/B/C/E XCS MP/PA/TA/TE/PL/TL/PR/TR Zamak case 3RO\DPLGH3$¿EHUJODVVLPSUHJQDWHG enclosure Actuators (all types): steel XC60, surface treated (1) Live parts of these switches are protected against the penetration of dust and water. However, when installing take all necessary precautions to prevent the penetration of solid bodies, or liquids with a high dust content, into the actuator aperture. Not recommended for use in saline atmospheres.

Characteristics

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Metal, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC, XCSE and XCSL Plastic, double insulated, turret head, types XCSMP, XCSPA, XCSTA and XCSTE

Contact block characteristics Rated operational characteristics

2 and 3 contact, slow break

Conventional thermal current in enclosure Rated insulation voltage

2 and 3 contact

Rated impulse withstand voltage Positive operation Resistance across terminals Short-circuit protection

2 and 3 contact

2 and 3 contact 3 contact

Connection

Pre-cabled Screw clamp terminals

2 contact, snap action 2 and 3 contact

XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSTA, XCSPA: a AC-15, A300: Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A or Ue = 120 V, Ie = 6 A XCSE, XCS TE: a AC-15, B300: Ue = 240 V, Ie = 1.5 A or Ue = 120 V, Ie = 3 A XCS MP: a AC-15, C300: Ue = 240 V, Ie = 0.75 A or Ue = 120 V, Ie = 1.5 A All models: c DC-13, Q300: Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.27 A or Ue = 125 V, Ie = 0.55 A conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSPA (2 & 3 slow break contact and 2 snap action contact versions) XCSE, XCS TE, XCSPA (3 snap action contact version): Ithe = 6 A XCS MP: Ithe = 2.5 A 3 contacts (XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSE, XCSTA), 2 contacts (XCSPA, XCS TE), 2 and 3 contacts (XCS MP): Ui = 500 V conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1; Ui = 300 V conforming to UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 3 contacts (XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSE, XCSTA), 2 contacts (XCSPA, XCS TE), 2 and 3 contacts (XCS MP): Uimp = 6 kV conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 N.C. contact(s) with positive opening operation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, Section 3 y 30 m1 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-4 3 contacts (XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSE, XCSTA), 2 contacts (XCSPA, XCS TE), 2 and 3 contacts (XCS MP): 10 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl) XCSPA: 6 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl) 4 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) or 6 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) (XCS MP), PVC

1

2

3

XCSPA, XCSTA: Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2), max: 2 x 14 AWG (1.5 mm2) 3 contacts (XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSE, XCSTA), 2 contacts (XCSPA, XCS TE): Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2), max: 2 x 14 AWG (1.5 mm2) with or without cable end

Electrical life

4

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix C. Utilisation categories AC-15 and DC-13. Maximum operating rate: 3600 operating cycles/hour. Load factor: 0.5

5

Millions of operating cycles

FRQWDFWYHUVLRQ;&6$%&(7$ and 2 slow break contact version 5 4 3

Ithe 230 V

2

12/24/48 V 110 V

1

6

0,5

0,2 0,1 0,5

1

2

3 4 5

10

Current in A

Voltage o

V W

24 13

48 9

120 7

7

Electrical Life The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the limited warranty offered on this product please refer to the Square D ® terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D ® Digest.

8

9

10

3/23

References, characteristics

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Metal, turret head (1), types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC and XCSE Conduit entries tapped 1/2” NPT

Type of switch

Without locking of actuator

With locking of actuator, manual unlocking (2)

1

2 LED indication on opening of N.C. contacts

Without

13

33

14

13

34

31

31

14

21

32

21 21 22

32

3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.C. slow break (3)

22

4

11

SROH1&1&12 (N.O. staggered) slow break (3)

12

3

22

References of switches without actuator ( SROH1&1212 (2 N.O. staggered) slow break (3)

Weight oz (kg)

1 orange LED 1 orange LED Without z 24/48 V a 110/240 V

1 orange LED 1 orange LED Without z 24/48 V a 110/240 V

N.C. contact with positive opening operation)

XCSA503

–

XCSA523

XCSB503

–

–

–

XCSA703

XCSA713

XCSA723

XCSB703

XCSB713

XCSB723

XCSC703

XCSA803

–

–

XCSB803

–

–

XCSC803

15.521 (0.440)

15.521 (0.440)

15.521 (0.440)

16.755 (0.475)

16.755 (0.475)

16.755 (0.475)

16.932 (0.480)

Complementary characteristics not shown under General characteristics SDJHDQG

5

Actuation speed

Maximum: 19.7 in./s (0.5 m/s), minimum: 0.39 in./s (0.01 m/s)

Resistance to forcible withdrawal of actuator

XCSB and XCSC: 337 lbs. (1500 N);; XCSE: 450 lbs. (2000 N)

Maximum operating rate

For maximum life: 600 operating cycles per hour

Minimum force for extraction of actuator u 4.5 lbs (20 N)

6

Cable entry

XCSA, XCSB, XCSC: 1 conduit entry XCSE: 2 conduit entries Entries tapped for 1/2” NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit

Materials

Body: zamak. Head: zamak. Safety screws: 5-lobe torque. Protective plate: steel.

References of actuators

7

8

9

10

Description

Straight actuator

Actuator with wide mounting Pivoting actuator

Latch for sliding doors (Padlockable in open position)

For guard switches XCS A, B, C, E

XCS Z01

XCS Z02

XCS Z03

XCS Z05

Weight oz (kg)

0.705 (0.020)

0.705 (0.020)

3.351 (0.095)

21.164 (0.600)

(1) Head adjustable in 90° steps throughout 360°. Blanking plug for operating head slot included with switch. (2) Unlocking by pushbutton for XCS Bppp and by key operated lock for XCS Cppp. (3) Schematic diagrams shown represent the contact states while the actuating key is inserted in the head of the switch. The devices listed above are threaded for 1/2" NPT, and are available with metric conduit: b To order devices tapped for 13 mm cable gland, conforming to NFC 68-300 (DIN PG 13.5): Change the last character in the part number to 1. For example: XCSA723 is changed to XCSA721. b To order devices tapped for M20 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland: Change the last character in the part number to 2. For example: XCSA723 is changed to XCSA722.

Principle: page 3/7

3/24

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/24

Dimensions: page 3/33

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/35

References, characteristics (continued)

Type of switch

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Metal, turret head (1), types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC and XCSE Conduit entries tapped 1/2” NPT With interlocking, locking by solenoid

1

2 Type of interlocking

Locking without power and unlocking on energization of solenoid (2). To order a guard switch with locking with power and unlocking on de-energization of the solenoid, replace the 2nd number (3) by 5 in the references shown below. Example: XCSE5313 becomes XCSE5513

LED indication

Orange LED: “guard open” signalling. Green LED: “guard closed and locked” signalling.

Supply voltage of solenoid

a or c 24 V (50/60 Hz on a)

a or c 110/120 V (3) (50/60 Hz on a)

Type of contact on solenoid

N.C. + N.O.

N.C. + N.O.

33 34 32

31

13

13

14

21

31

14

21

32

21

22

12

11

3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.C. slow break (4)

22

SROH1&1&12 (N.O. staggered) slow break (4)

22

References of switches without actuating key ( SROH1&1212 (2 N.O. staggered) slow break (4)

Weight oz (kg)

3

4

N.C. contact with positive opening operation)

XCSE5313

XCSE5333

XCSE7313

XCSE7333

XCSE8313

XCSE8333

5 (5) 40.212 (1.140)

6

Solenoid characteristics Load factor

100 %

Rated operational voltage

a or c 24 V

Voltage limits

- 20%, + 10% of the rated operational voltage (including ripple on c) conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1

Service life

20,000 hours

Power consumption

Inrush: 10 VA. Sealed: 10 VA

a or c9

7

LED indicator characteristics Rated insulation voltage

50 V conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1

250 V conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1

Current power consumption

7 mA

7 mA

Rated operational voltage

a or c9

a9

Voltage limits

a or c 20...52 V (including ripple)

a 95...264 V (including ripple)

Service life

100,000 hours

100,000 hours

Protection against overvoltages

Yes

Yes

8

(1) Head adjustable in 90° steps throughout 360°. Blanking plug for operating head slot included with switch. (2) A key operated lock enables forced opening of the interlocking mechanism, by authorized personnel, allowing withdrawal of the actuating key and subsequent opening of the N.C. safety contacts. (3) For use on c 110/120 V, remove the LED module. (4) Wiring diagrams shown represent the contact states while the actuating key is inserted in the head of the switch. (5) Switches supplied with a single green LED. (6) The N.O. contacts will close after the N.C. contacts open. They do not change state simultaneously. The devices listed above are threaded for 1/2" NPT, and are available with metric conduit: b To order devices tapped for 13mm cable gland, conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 13.5): Change the last character in the part number to 1 For example: XCSE7333 is changed to XCSE7331 b To order devices tapped for M20 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland: Change the last character in the part number to 2 For example: XCSE7333 is changed to XCSE7332

Principle: page 3/7

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/25

Dimensions: page 3/33

9

10

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/36

3/25

Selection

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated 0HWDO¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&6/ Conduit entries tapped 1/2” NPT XCS Safety Interlock; Type XCSL Selection

0HWDO7\SH;&6/&RQGXLW(QWU\7DSSHG137/RFNLQJ:LWKRXW3RZHU Positive opening N.C. contacts meet the IEC and EN requirements for positive opening contacts per IEC/EN 60947-5-1; and NEMA ICS-5, part 6 (positive opening action). Standard devices are shown on pages 3/26 and 3/27. If these devices do not meet your application requirements, refer to page 3/28 to build a part number.

1

Type of Switch

:LWK,QWHUORFNLQJ/RFNLQJE\(OHFWURPDJQHW% Locking Without Power. Actuating key locks into switch when inserted. This is typically preferred as the door is secured regardless of electrical power availability or power failure. Applying power to the electromagnet will unlock actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. Applying power to the electromagnet will open the N.C. safety contacts as well.

Type of interlocking

2 XCSL764F3

3

Position of Head (for actuating key)

To Right

To Left

Position of Electromagnet Connector

To Left

To Right

Position of Ronis key release lock

Front

Front

LED indication Supply voltage of electromagnet

Orange LED: “guard open” signaling 24 Vdc 120 Vac or 230 Vac or Vdc 6 Vdc 6

24 Vdc

120 Vac or Vdc 6

230 Vac or Vdc 6

13

13 14

34

31

33

22 21

14

N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) slow break z¢

32

4

22

N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O. staggered) slow break z¢

21

5HIHUHQFHVRIVZLWFKHVZLWKRXWDFWXDWLQJNH\VHOHFWDFWXDWLQJNH\IURPSDJH

Weight oz (kg)

% XCSL766F3 6 z

5

¢

XCSL564B3

XCSL564F3

XCSL564M3

XCSL566B3

XCSL566F3

XCSL566M3

XCSL764B3

XCSL764F3

XCSL764M3

XCSL766B3

XCSL766F3

XCSL766M3

32 (0.920 kg)

32 (0.920 kg)

32 (0.920 kg)

32 (0.920 kg)

32 (0.920 kg)

32 (0.920 kg)

A Ronis key operated lock allows the forced opening of the guard in an emergency situation. When the Ronis key is turned to the unlock position, the actuating key is unlocked and is free to be removed from the switch. The N.C. safety contacts will open when the Ronis key is turned to the unlock position as well. For use on 110/120 Vdc or 220/240 Vdc, remove the LED indicator module. Schematic diagrams shown represent the contact states while the actuating key is fully inserted and engaged in the head of the switch. The N.O. contacts will close after the N.C. contacts open. They do not change state simultaneously.

Only the N.C. contacts should be used in the safety control circuit. The N.O. contacts are provided solely for signalling – NOT for safety functions. $FWXDWLQJKHDGVROHQRLGDQGUHODWHGFRPSRQHQWVDUH127¿HOGFRQYHUWLEOHDQGVKRXOGQRWEHURWDWHGRUPRGL¿HG The only replacement parts or components available are covers and LED indicator modules. These devices are not to be

UHSDLUHGRUDGMXVWHG The complete switch should be replaced.

6

Complementary Characteristics not shown under general characteristics SDJHVDQG

7

Actuation speed Resistance to Forcible Key Withdrawal 0D[LPXP2SHUDWLQJ5DWH Minimum Force for Positive 2SHQLQJ

Maximum: 19.7 in/s (0.5 m/s), Minimum: 0.39 in/s (0.01 m/s) XCSL: 337 lbs. (1500 N)

Conduit Entry

XCSL: 1 entry. Conduit entry tapped for 1/2 NPT

For maximum life: 600 operating cycles per hour, i.e.: 10/min. (or once in 6 seconds) 4.5 lbs (20 N)

Electromagnet Characteristics '&HOHFWURPDJQHWLVVXSSOLHGRQDOO;&6/PRGHOV)RUXVHZLWKDQ$&SRZHUVXSSO\DEULGJHUHFWL¿HULVVXSSOLHGLQWKHFRQQHFWRU on all AC devices. Load Factor 100% 5DWHG2SHUDWLRQDO9ROWDJH 24 Vac or Vdc 110/120 Vac or Vdc 220/240 Vac or Vdc Voltage Limits -10%, +10% of the rated operational voltage (including ripple on) conforming to IEC 60947-1 Power consumption Inrush: 10 VA. Sealed: 10 VA

8

/(',QGLFDWRU&KDUDFWHULVWLFV

9

5DWHG2SHUDWLRQDO9ROWDJH 5DWHG,QVXODWLRQ9ROWDJH Current Power consumption Voltage Limits

24 Vac or Vdc 50 V conforming to IEC 60947-1 7 mA 20...30 Vac or Vdc (including ripple)

110 Vac 220 Vac 250 V conforming to IEC 60947-1 2.5 mA 5 mA 95...130 Vac 190...260 Vac (including ripple) (including ripple) Yes

3URWHFWLRQ$JDLQVW2YHU Yes voltages The devices listed above are threaded for 1/2” NPT, and are available with metric conduit: ‡ 7RRUGHUGHYLFHVWDSSHGIRUPPFDEOHJODQGFRQIRUPLQJWR1)&',13J &KDQJHWKHODVWFKDUDFWHULQWKHSDUW number to 1 For example: XCSL764B3 is changed to XCSL764B1 ‡ 7RRUGHUGHYLFHVWDSSHGIRU0[IRU,62FDEOHJODQG&KDQJHWKHODVWFKDUDFWHULQWKHSDUWQXPEHUWR For example: XCSL764B3 is changed to XCSL764B2

10 Principle: page 3/7

3/26

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/26

Dimensions: page 3/38

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/38

Selection (continued)

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated 0HWDO¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&6/ Conduit entries tapped 1/2” NPT

XCS Safety Interlock: Type XCSL Selection

0HWDO7\SH;&6/&RQGXLW(QWU\7DSSHG137/RFNLQJ:LWK3RZHU Positive opening N.C. contacts meets the IEC and EN requirements for positive opening contacts per IEC/EN 60947-5-1; and NEMA ICS-5, part 6 (positive opening action). Standard devices are shown on pages 3/26 and 3/27. If these devices do not meet your application requirements, refer to page 3/28 to build a part number.

XCSL784F3

Type of Switch

:LWK,QWHUORFNLQJ/RFNLQJE\(OHFWURPDJQHW %

Type of interlocking

Locking With Power. Actuating key locks into switch only when actuating key is inserted and power is applied to the electromagnet. Door or guard is not locked in the event of a power failure or when power is removed from the electro-magnet. Removing power from the electromagnet will unlock actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. Removing power to the electromagnet will open the N.C. safety contacts as well.

2

Note: Locking with power devices do not meet European standards regarding the safety of machinery, especially EN 1088 regarding guard locking. European standards do not allow a “locking with power” function for gate or door guarding/locking. Locking without power devices meet European requirements, and should be used when machinery is to be shipped to Europe or where machinery must meet European standards. Position of Head (for actuating key) Position of Electromagnet Connector Position of Ronis key release lock LED indication Supply voltage of electromagnet

To Right

To Left

To Left

To Right

Front Orange LED: “guard open” signaling

Front

24 Vdc

24 Vdc

120 Vac or Vdc 6

230 Vac or Vdc 6

3 120 Vac or Vdc 6

230 Vac or Vdc 6

13

34

13

Weight oz (kg). %

6 z ¢

4

33

14

31

14

22

21

32

N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) slow break z¢

22

N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O. staggered) slow break z¢

21

5HIHUHQFHVRIVZLWFKHVZLWKRXWDFWXDWLQJNH\VHOHFWDFWXDWLQJNH\IURPSDJH

XCSL786F3

1

XCSL584B3

XCSL584F3

XCSL584M3

XCSL586B3

XCSL586F3

XCSL586M3

XCSL784B3

XCSL784F3

XCSL784M3

XCSL786B3

XCSL786F3

XCSL786M3

32 (0.920 kg)

32 (0.920 kg)

32 (0.920 kg)

32 (0.920 kg)

32 (0.920 kg)

5

32 (0.920 kg)

A Ronis key operated lock allows the forced opening of the guard in an emergency situation. When the Ronis key is turned to the unlock position, the actuating key is unlocked and is free to be removed from the switch. The N.C. safety contacts will open when the Ronis key is turned to the unlock position as well. For use on 110/120 Vdc or 220/240 Vdc, remove the LED indicator module. Schematic diagrams shown represent the contact states while the actuating key is fully inserted and engaged in the head of the switch. The N.O. contacts will close after the N.C. contacts open. They do not change state simultaneously.

6

Only the N.C. contacts should be used in the safety control circuit. The N.O. contacts are provided solely for signalling – NOT for safety functions. $FWXDWLQJKHDGVROHQRLGDQGUHODWHGFRPSRQHQWVDUH127¿HOGFRQYHUWLEOHDQGVKRXOGQRWEHURWDWHGRUPRGL¿HG The only replacement parts or components available are covers and LED indicator modules. These devices are not to be repaired RUDGMXVWHG The complete switch should be replaced.

Complementary Characteristics not shown under general characteristics SDJHVDQG Actuation Speed Resistance to Forcible Key Withdrawal 0D[LPXP2SHUDWLQJ5DWH 0LQLPXP)RUFHIRU3RVLWLYH2SHQLQJ

Maximum: 19.7 in/s (0.5 m/s), Minimum: 0.39 in/s (0.01 m/s) XCSL: 337 lbs. (1500 N) For maximum life: 600 operating cycles per hour, i.e.: 10/min. (or once in 6 seconds) 4.5 lbs (20 N)

Conduit Entry

XCSL: 1 entry. Conduit entry tapped for 1/2 NPT

7

Electromagnet Characteristics

8

'&HOHFWURPDJQHWLVVXSSOLHGRQDOO;&6/PRGHOV)RUXVHZLWKDQ$&SRZHUVXSSO\DEULGJHUHFWL¿HULVVXSSOLHGLQWKHFRQQHFWRURQDOO$&GHYLFHV Load Factor 5DWHG2SHUDWLRQDO9ROWDJH Voltage Limits Power consumption

100% 24 Vac or Vdc 110/120 Vac or Vdc 220/240 Vac or Vdc -10%, +10% of the rated operational voltage (including ripple on) conforming to IEC 60947-1 Inrush: 10 VA. Sealed: 10 VA

/(',QGLFDWRU&KDUDFWHULVWLFV

9

5DWHG2SHUDWLRQDO9ROWDJH

24 Vac or Vdc

5DWHG,QVXODWLRQ9ROWDJH

50 V conforming to IEC 60947-1

250 V conforming to IEC 60947-1

Current Power consumption

7 mA

7 mA

5 mA

Voltage Limits

20...30 Vac or Vdc (including ripple)

95...264 Vac (including ripple)

190...260 Vac (including ripple)

3URWHFWLRQ$JDLQVW2YHUYROWDJHV

Yes

Yes

110/240 Vac

220 Vac

10

The devices listed above are threaded for 1/2” NPT, and are available with metric conduit: ‡ 7RRUGHUGHYLFHVWDSSHGIRUPPFDEOHJODQGFRQIRUPLQJWR1)&',13J &KDQJHWKHODVWFKDUDFWHULQWKHSDUWQXPEHUWR For example: XCSL784B3 is changed to XCSL784B1 ‡ 7RRUGHUGHYLFHVWDSSHGIRU0[IRU,62FDEOHJODQG&KDQJHWKHODVWFKDUDFWHULQWKHSDUWQXPEHUWR For example: XCSL784B3 is changed to XCSL784B2

Principle: page 3/7

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/28

Dimensions: page 3/38

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/38

3/27

Selection (continued)

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated 0HWDO¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&6/ Conduit entries tapped 1/2” NPT

XCS Safety Interlock: Type XCSL Selection

0HWDO7\SH;&6/&RQGXLW(QWU\7DSSHG137 Positive opening N.C. contacts meets the IEC and EN requirements for positive opening contacts per IEC/EN 60947-5-1; and NEMA ICS-5, part 6 (positive opening action). If the devices shown on pages 3/26 and 3/27 do not meet you application needs, use the table below to build a part number. A complete part number requires a code character from each of the following columns: Base Number, Ronis Key Position, Actuating Key and Connector, Electromagnet Voltage, and Conduit Connection. A code character column Connector is optional, and is only used if a connector is required for the application.

1

All devices have an Orange LED as standard.

2

5HIHUHQFHVRIVZLWFKHVZLWKRXWDFWXDWLQJNH\VHOHFWDFWXDWLQJNH\IURPSDJH Base Number

Ronis Key Position

Actuating Key and Connector

Electromagnet voltage

Conduit Connection

Connector (Optional)

Contact Arrangement

3

N.C. + N.O. + N.O.

XCSL5

N.C. + N.C. + N.O.

XCSL7

Locking Without Power Front Ronis Key Position

4

6

Right

2

Left

0

Back

4

Locking With Power Note: A Ronis key lock is NOT provided on the Locking With Power devices.

8

Actuating Key and Connector Position Actuating Key Position

5

Connector Position

Front

Right Left

6

Back

Left

1

Right

2

Back

3

Left

4

Front

5

Right

6

Front

7

Left

8

Right

9

Front

0

Electromagnet Supply Voltage 24 Vdc

B

110 Vac

F

220 Vac

M

Conduit Connection

7

PG 13.5

1

M20 x 1.5

2

1/2 inch NPT

3

Connector (optional) 5 Pin Mini (LEDs not wired/powered)

CA

6 Pin Mini (use with LEDs)

DA

7\SHRI,QWHUORFNLQJ

8

Locking Without Power. Actuating key locks into switch when inserted. This is typically preferred as the door is secured regardless of electrical power availability or power failure. Applying power to the electromagnet will unlock actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. Applying power to the electromagnet will open the N.C. safety contacts as well. Locking With Power. Actuating key locks into switch only when actuating key is inserted and power is applied to the electromagnet. Door or guard is not locked in the event of a power failure or when power is removed from the electromagnet. Removing power from the electromagnet will unlock actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. Removing power to the electromagnet will open the N.C. safety contacts as well. Note: Locking with power devices do not meet European standards regarding the safety of machinery, especially EN 1088 regarding guard locking. European standards do not allow a “locking with power” function for gate or door guarding/locking. Locking without power devices meet European requirements, and should be used when machinery is to be shipped to Europe or where machinery must meet European standards.

9

10 Principle: page 3/7

3/28

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/26

Dimensions: page 3/38

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/38

References

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Metal, turret head, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC and XCSE

Separate components Description

8

1 orange LED indicator module with cover, seal and 2 mounting screws

For use with XCSA XCSB XCSC

1 orange LED + XCSE73pp 1 green LED indicator module with cover + lock (1), seal and 4 mounting screws (2 keys included for lock)

8

XCS Z3p

Supply voltage a or c 24/48 V

Reference

Weight oz (kg) 1.41 (0.040)

XCS Z31

a 110/240 V

XCS Z32

1.41 (0.040)

a or c 24/48 V

XCS Z43

6.17 (0.175)

809848

(1) Lock incorporated as standard on safety interlock switches XCSE: key withdrawal in LOCK and UNLOCK positions.

1

2

3

4 XCS Z4p Description Blanking plugs for operating head slot (Sold in lots of 10)

For use with XCSA, XCSB, C, XCSE

Key withdrawal positions from lock –

Tubular high security XCSC, keys to manually XCSE unlock and open guards (Sold in lots of 10)

–

Padlocking XCSA, attachment XCSB, C, to prevent insertion XCSE of actuating key, for up to 3 padlocks (padlocks not included).

–

Unit reference XCS Z27

XCS Z25

Weight oz (kg) 1.76 (0.050)

5

3.53 (0.100)

8

6 XCS Z90

1.94 (0.055)

7

The padlock attachment cannot be used as a lock-out tag-out means.

XCS Z90

Description

For use with

Unit reference

137FRQGXLW adaptor (Sold in lots of 5)

XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSE

DE9 RA2012

M20 x 1.5 adaptor (Sold in lots of 5)

XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSE

DE9 RA13520

Weight oz (kg) 1.69 (0.048)

8

0.35 (0.010)

9

10 Principle: pages 3/7

Characteristics page 3/22

References: page 3/29

Dimensions: page 3/33

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/35

3/29

References (continued)

;&66DIHW\,QWHUORFN6ZLWFKHV

Safety interlock switches, actuator operated 0HWDO¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&6/

Actuating keys and accessories, for XCSL only

1

Description

Indicator light module, 1 orange LED with cover, seal, and 2 mounting screws.

Type

Catalog Number

24/48 Vac or Vdc

XCSZ33

110/230 Vac

XCSZ34

DC

ZCKJ921

AC &RQWDLQVDUHFWL¿HUEULGJHLQVLGHFRQQHFWRU for use on AC

ZCKJ922

Cable 6.6 ft. (2m) length

XSZCA1501Y

Cable 13.1 ft. (4m) length

XSZCA1502Y

Cable 6.6 ft. (2m) length

XSZCA1601Y

Cable 13.1 ft. (4m) length

XSZCA1602Y

XCSZ33

2

Connector for electromagnet (supplied with switches as standard)

BH206

ZCKJ921 Plug and cable assemblies mini-style 5 pins ›

3 Plug and cable assemblies mini-style 6 pins ›

ZCKY071

Straight actuating key

ZCKY071

Actuating key for perpendicular mounting/mounting

ZCKY081

Adjustable actuating key for Horizontal movement

ZCKY091

Adjustable actuating key for Vertical movement

ZCKY061

Sliding bolt actuating key

ZCKY101

Overriding key: Ronis 520 key (sold in lots of 2)

Q9990912

Padlock attachment to lock into actuating key opening. Painted yellow. Prevents actuating key from entering switch. Note: Cannot be used as a lock-out tag-out means.

ZCKZ01

4 ZCKY081

5 ZCKY091

6 ›

More varieties and lengths of connector cables are available. See Sensors catalog # 9006CT0101.

ZCKY061

7 ZCKY101

8

ZCKZ01

9

10 Principle: page 3/7

3/30

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/26

Dimensions: page 3/38

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/38

References (continued)

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Metal, turret head, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC, XCSE, XCSL

XCS Safety Interlock Pre-wired Mini Connectors

3UH:LUHG0LQL&RQQHFWRUVIRU;&66DIHW\,QWHUORFNV

3 pin

1 2

3

1-Green 2-Black 3-White

The XCS safety interlock switches are available with mini connectors in several different wiring schemes. Each wiring option shown below has a notation of ZKLFKGHYLFHVDUHDYDLODEOHZLWKWKDWRSWLRQ$GGWKHIROORZLQJVXI¿[HVWRWKH appropriate XCS catalog number. Only a small number of the pre-wired options available are listed here and on the next page. Many other connectors and wiring schemes are available. New wiring schemes to meet your applications are available upon request.

1

.

5 pin

1

5

2

4 3

1-White 2-Red 3-Green 4-Orange 5-Black

6 pin

1

5 6

2

4 3

1-Orange 2-Blue 3-Black 4-White 5-Red 6-Green

3LQIRUDOO;&6([FHSW;&6(;&603DQG;&6'0 6XI¿[$$ Switch Terminals Wire Color 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green

2

3LQIRUDOO;&6([FHSW;&6(;&603DQG;&6'0 6XI¿[&$9 Switch Terminals Wire Color 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green

3LQIRU;&6( 6XI¿[&&9 Switch Terminals Wire Color 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green

3LQIRUDOO;&6([FHSW;&6(;&603DQG;&6'0 6XI¿[&%9 Switch Terminals Wire Color 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green

3LQIRU;&6( 6XI¿[&'9 Switch Terminals Wire Color 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green

3LQIRUDOO;&6ZLWK/('H[FHSWIRU;&6( 6XI¿['$ Switch Terminals Wire Color 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green 9 Not for XCSDevices with all N.C. contacts. Device must have at least 1 N.O. contact. More connector versions are available on the next page

3

4

5

NOTE: View of connectors shown above are the male views as it is installed in the switch.

6

7

8

9

10 Principle: page 3/7

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/31

3/31

References (continued)

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Metal, turret head, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC, XCSE, and XCSL

3UH:LUHG0LQL&RQQHFWRUVIRU;&66DIHW\,QWHUORFNV (continued)

7 pin

1 1 2

6 7

3

5 4

1-White-Blk. Tr. 2-Black 3-White 4-Red 5-Orange 6-Blue 7-Green

3LQIRU;&6( 6XI¿[($9 Switch Terminals Wire Color 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe

2 9 pin 1

3

4

2

6 7 8

9

3

4

5

1 - Orange 2 - Blue 3 - Red-Blk. Tr. 4 - Green-Blk. Tr. 5 - White 6 - Red 7 - Green 8 - White-Blk. Tr. 9 - Black

NOTE: View of connectors shown above are the male views as it is installed in the switch.

5

The XCS safety interlock switches are available with mini connectors in several different wiring schemes. Each wiring option shown EHORZDQGRQWKHSUHYLRXVSDJHKDVDQRWDWLRQRIZKLFKGHYLFHVDUHDYDLODEOHZLWKWKDWRSWLRQ$GGWKHIROORZLQJVXI¿[HVWRWKH appropriate XCS catalog number. Only a small number of the pre-wired options available are listed here and on the previous page. Many other connectors and wiring schemes are available. New wiring schemes to meet your applications are available upon request.

3LQIRU;&6( 6XI¿[(%9 Switch Terminals Wire Color 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe 3LQIRU;&6(ORFNLQJZLWKRXWSRZHU 6XI¿[(&9 Switch Terminals Wire Color 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe Jumper between 52 and 21 (installed by Schneider Electric) Jumper between 22 and X2 (installed by Schneider Electric) Jumper between 34 and X3 (installed by Schneider Electric)

3LQIRU;&6(ORFNLQJZLWKRXWSRZHU 6XI¿[('9 Switch Terminals Wire Color 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe Jumper between 52 and 21 (installed by Schneider Electric) Jumper between 22 and X2 (installed by Schneider Electric) Jumper between 34 and X3 (installed by Schneider Electric) 3LQIRU;&6( 6XI¿[(( Switch Terminals Wire Color 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe 3LQIRU;&6( 6XI¿[() Switch Terminals Wire Color 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe

3LQIRU;&6( 6XI¿[*$9 3LQIRU;&6( 6XI¿[*%9 Switch Terminals Wire Color Switch Terminals Wire Color 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Red with Black tracer/stripe 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Red with Black tracer/stripe 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green with Black tracer/stripe 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green with Black tracer/stripe E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe 3LQIRU;&6( /RFNLQJZLWK3RZHU 6XI¿[*& 3LQIRU;&6( /RFNLQJZLWKRXW3RZHU 6XI¿[*' Switch Terminals Wire Color Switch Terminals Wire Color 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Red with Black tracer/stripe 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Red with Black tracer/stripe 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green with Black tracer/stripe 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green with Black tracer/stripe E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe 9 Not for XCSDevices with all N.C. contacts. Device must have at least 1 N.O. contact. More connector versions are available on the the previous page.

6

7

8

9

10 Principle: page 3/7

3/32

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/31

Dimensions

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Metal, turret head, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC and XCSE

Dimensions Safety interlock switches XCSAppp

1

XCSBppp, XCSCppp

2

.28 7

1.46

.28

2.05

37

7

1.3 33

33

33

33

52

1.3

1.3

1.3

1.71

1.71

1.5 38

43.5

1.5

2xØ.21

43.5

3

2xØ.21

1.12

38

2xØ5.3

2xØ5.3

28.5

4.47 113.5

4.47 113.5

2.36

2.36

60

60

4 = 1.18

.63

(1)

1.73

1.57

44

40

40

(1) 1/2” NPT conduit entry

(1) 1/2” NPT conduit entry

Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 7.3

Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 7.3

Safety interlock switches

M20 x 1.5 adaptor DE9 RA13520

XCSEpppp

5 137FRQGXLWDGDSWRU DE9 RA2012

1.89

(1)

48

.75 19

1.1

7

1.3

(1) Tapped entry for 1/2" NPT conduit (2) M20 x 1.5 threaded shank

.14

33

7

3.5

.47

1.71

12

1.5

6

Ø26

(1) M20 x 1.5 tapped entry (2) Pg 13.5 threaded shank

33

(2)

Ø1.02

24

1.3

.84 21.3

28

.94

.28

=

30

16

1.73

1.57

44

= 1.18

.63

(1)

=

30

16

43.5

38

8

2xØ.21 2xØ5.3

5.75

3.74

146

(1)

95

4.45 113

9

1.02 26

(1)

=

.63 1.73

16

44

.24 6

=

3.46 3.86 98

88

(1)

Dual Dimensions:

1.02

INCHES Millimieters

26

10

(1) 1/2” NPT conduit entry Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 7.3

Principle: page 3/7

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/24

Dimensions: page 3/33

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/35

3/33

Dimensions (continued)

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Metal, turret head, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC and XCSE

Dimensions (continued) XCS Z01

1

XCS Z02 0.1

3.21

0.1

.12

2.5

1.38

2.5

81.5

Adaptor shank (1) 35

.43

2.19

3

11

55.5

== .98

20

33

25

==

14

1.38

2.01

35

.43

.79

0.3

11

20

7.5

51

=

.79

1.3

3

.55

15

==

2

.59

25

=

.98

1.3 33

0.1 2.5

(1) Adaptor (included with actuator XCS Z01) for replacing, without drilling additional mounting hole, a safety interlock switch XCK J with actuating key ZCK Y07 by an XCSA, B, C or E with actuating key XCS Z01. Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 10 XCS Z03

Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 10 XCS Z05

0.1

.28

.2.99

2.5

41

4

1.89 1.18 48

1.57

1.02

40

26

30

1.18 30

7

1.61

76

1.18 30

.98

.98

1.65

25

25

.43

.43

11

11

42

4.53

2.4

115

64

.49

.28 7

12.5

1.57

.24

5.51

40

5

6

140

Ø.21

.43

Ø5.3

11

0.1

1.3

.67

33

17

.91

1.26

.71

32

.79

18

20

23

2.5

4xM5

6

Mounting axis % related to actuator.

Ø.39

.79

3.94

.79

20

100

20

Ø10

.24 6

Ø: 4 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 7.3

2SHUDWLQJUDGLXVUHTXLUHGIRUDFWXDWRU XCS Z01

XCS Z02

RR

RR ==

2708 20 0.70

7

20

00

00

3.35 85

RR

RR ==

=

7280 20 .070

.07

0

2708 0.70

20

00

00

3.35 85

85

8

= 728 0

2.28 58

85

58

2.28 58 58

XCS Z03

.65

2.17 55

16.5

0

.7

1

9 5. 50

9

15

40

=

22

=

R

.87

R

3.11

10

79

Dual Dimensions:

3.11 79

INCHES Millimieters

R = minimum radius

Principle: page 3/7

3/34

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/24

Dimensions: page 3/34

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/35

Wiring diagrams

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Metal, turret head, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC and XCSE

Functional diagrams XCS p5ppp

XCS p7ppp

XCS p8ppp

Contact operation

1

G Contact closed H Contact open 1.22 31

.91

1.22

.98

.98

25

.91

23

31

G Contact in transition

31

25

2

.91 23

21-22

.89

11-12

31-32

.83 21

.98

25

23

21-22 22.5

1.22

21-22

.87

13-14

.85

33-34

21.5

22

31-32

13-14

Dual Dimensions:

INCHES Millimieters

3

Wiring diagrams Note: These diagrams are given as examples only, the designer must refer to the relevant safety standards for guidance :LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1 ,62 Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O. contact and protection fuse to prevent jumpering of the N.C. contact, either by cable damage or by tampering.

:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62 Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O. contact with mixed redundancy of the contacts and the associated control relays. To activate K1, it is necessary to remove and re-insert the actuating key when the supply is switched on.

F1

F1

4

O K1

33

21

K2 KM1

34

22

14

34

22

14

13

33

13

21

K1

5

(1)

O

I K2

I

KM2

KM1

X K1

K2 KM2

X

K1

K2

H1

M

(1) Signalling contact

6 M

H1: “actuating key not inserted” indicator

7

:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62:LULQJPHWKRGXVHGLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWK3UHYHQWDŒVDIHW\PRGXOH (The guard switch should be used in conjunction with a safety limit switch to give electrical/mechanical redundancy) Method for machines with quick rundown time (low inertia) Locking or interlocking device based on the principle of redundancy and self-monitoring. The safety modules ensure these functions.

Method for machines with long rundown time (high inertia)

8

XPS VNE

XPS

Locking of actuating key and operation in positive mode associated with a safety module.

9

XPS

Interlocking device for actuating key mounted on guard and zero speed detection.

10 Principle: page 3/7

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/24

Dimensions: page 3/33

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/35

3/35

Wiring diagrams (continued)

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Metal, turret head, type XCSE

:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62 Wiring examples with protective fuse to prevent jumpering of the N.C. contact, either by cable damage or by tampering.

1

/RFNLQJZLWKRXWSRZHU1&1212 XCSE53pp

/RFNLQJZLWKSRZHU1&1212 XCSE55pp

F1

F1

2 14

33

34

21

(2)

14

33

34

(1)

44

51

OG GN

X3

E1 X1

X1

O

5

X2

E2

43

X2

E2

43

OG GN

X3

E1

4

22

13

51

(1)

52

22

13

52

21

44

3

(2)

O

I

I

X

X

X

X

6

M

M

7

(1) Solenoid (2) Auxiliary contact E1-E2: Solenoid supply 43-44: Solenoid signalling contact 13-14: Safety contact, available for redundancy 33-X1: LED (orange): actuating key withdrawn 51-X1: LED (green): actuating key inserted and locked 21-52: Safety pre-wiring provided

(1) Solenoid (2) Auxiliary contact E1-E2: Solenoid supply 51-52: Solenoid signalling contact 13-14: Safety contact, available for redundancy 33-X1: LED (orange): actuating key withdrawn 43-X1: LED (green): actuating key inserted and locked 21-44: Safety pre-wiring provided

8

Note: These wiring diagrams are given as examples only, the designer must refer relevant safety standards for guidance.

9

10 Principle: page 3/7

3/36

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/25

Dimensions: page 3/33

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/36

Wiring diagrams (continued)

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Metal, turret head, type XCSE

:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62 Wiring examples with redundancy for the switch contacts, without monitoring or redundancy in the power circuit /RFNLQJZLWKRXWSRZHU1&1&12 XCSE73pp

1

/RFNLQJZLWKRXWSRZHU1&1&12 XCSE75pp

F1

F1

(1)

22 32 14

K1

I

KM1

E2 43

O

KM2

E1

X2

22 32 14

K2

X3

OG GN

X2

3

O KM1 I

KM2

4

X1

X1 KM1 K1

K1

44 51

44 51

X3

OG GN

21 31 13

(1)

K2

E1

E2 43

(2)

52

21 31 13

52

(2)

2

F2

F2

K2

KM1 KM2

K1

K2

KM2

M (1) Solenoid (2) Auxiliary contact E1-E2: Solenoid supply 43-44: Solenoid signalling contact 21-22 and 31-32: Safety contacts, available for redundancy 13-X1: LED (orange): actuating key withdrawn 51-X1: LED (green): actuating key inserted and locked 21-52: Safety pre-wiring provided

M

5

(1) Solenoid (2) Auxiliary contact E1-E2: Solenoid supply 51-52: Solenoid signalling contact 21-22 and 31-32: Safety contacts, available for redundancy 13-X1: LED (orange): actuating key withdrawn 43-X1: LED (green): actuating key inserted and locked 21-44: Safety pre-wiring provided

6

7

8

9

10 Principle: page 3/7

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/25

Dimensions: page 3/33

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/36

3/37

Dimensions

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated 0HWDO¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&6/

XCS Safety Interlock: Type XCSL Dimensions

Metal, turret head, type XCSL dimensions XCSL%66%%

1

2.99

1.65 42

XCSL%64%% 2.99

1.65

76

1.38

42

1.38

35

35

1.38

1.38

35

35

4.89

4.89

2

76

124

124

0.24 7.64

7.64

6

194

194

1.38 2xØ 0.21

35

1.38

0.24

35

6

2xØ 0.21

5.3

3

5.3

2.36

2.36

60

60

(1)

(1)

1.18

=

1.32 1.73

Ø =

33.5

1.58

1.73

40

44

1.18

=

1.32

30

33.5

1.58

Ø =

30

40

44

4

5

Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.21 x 0.29 (5.3 x 7.3)

Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.21 x 0.29 (5.3 x 7.3)

(1) 1 tapped entry for 1/2” NPT conduit entry

(1) 1 tapped entry for 1/2” NPT conduit entry

Wiring Diagrams :LULQJGLDJUDPH[DPSOHXVLQJDSROH1&1&12VDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFK LED wiring Shown with actuating key inserted

6

LED, 24 Vac

Recommended wiring diagram Locking with and without power

LED, 110/120 Vac or 220/240 Vac

X3

21 22

X1

13

31

14

32

X3

21 22

7

X1

13

31

14

32

+ 24 V

X

0V

Contact Status Relative to Actuating Key Position

8

E1

22

21

32

31

14

13

X3

OG

10A

X1

Function Diagrams 1&1&12

1&1212

1.65

1.65

42

42

9

E2

1.5

1.5

38

38

21-22

21-22 N.C. + N.C. + N.O.

31-32

N.C. + N.O. + N.O.

13-14

33-34

13-14

Dual Dimensions:

10

INCHES Millimieters

Contact closed (1) Contact open (0)

Principle: page 3/7

3/38

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/26

Dimensions: page 3/38

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/38

Dimensions (continued)

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated 0HWDO¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&6/

Actuating Keys for Metal, Turret Head, Type XCSL Actuating Keys ZCKY071

ZCKY081

1

ZCKY091

1.65

42

42

1.65

0.77

12

42

19.6

= =

1.65

0.47

1.58

0.2

0.2

0.1

5

2xØ 0.21

5

2.5

40

0.1

2

2.5

5.3

0.32 8

46

3.05

2.17 0.59

0.24

15

6

77.5

55

1.58

0.59 1.14

= =

15

1.58 40

2.01

0.33

29

1.18

40

30

3

51

8.3

2xØ 0.21

2xØ 0.21

=

1.81

75

=

2.96

5.3

5.3

ZCKY061

ZCKY101

10

7

4xØ 0.21

41

12

.39

4

0.28

1.62

0.47

5.3

1.65

1.89

42

48

1.58

1.02

40

26

1.54 39

1.77

.39 10

45

2xØ 0.21

0.49

5.3

4.53

2.52

115

64

5

0.28 7

12.5

0.24

1.30

3.05

33

77.5

0.99

5.51

Ø 0.43

140

11

6

1.26

0.79

32

20

6

25

4xØ M0.21 5.3

0.79

2xØ 0.21

20

5.3

3.94

0.79

100

20

0.71 18

0.24 6

2SHUDWLQJUDGLXVUHTXLUHGIRUDFWXDWLQJNH\

7

Horizontal mounting ZCKY071

ZCKY081

ZCKY091

118.2

2.32

39.4

2.29

3000

59

1000

58

(1)

3.21

ZCKY101

5.91

2.80

150

71

81.5

(1)

(1)

8 Vertical mounting ZCKY071

ZCKY081

98.5 1.65 42

2500

(1)

1.65 42

ZCKY061

ZCKY101

59.1

1.65

7.88

1500

42

200

(1)

2.48 63

9

(1)

10 (1) For mounting the actuating key on hinged guards (minimum radius)

Principle: page 3/7

Characteristics: page 3/22

Dual Dimensions:

References: page 3/26

Dimensions: page 3/38

INCHES Millimieters

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/38

3/39

References, characteristics

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated 3ODVWLFGRXEOHLQVXODWHG¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&603 Pre-cabled, length 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft (2, 5, or 10 m)

Type of switch

Without locking of actuating key

1

2

OG OG/WH

OG OG OG/WH

OG/WH

OG BN BN/WH

OG/WH

BU BU/WH

BU BU/WH

BN

6

BN/WH

3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.C. slow break (2) 6.6 ft (2m) cable (3)

BU

SROH1&1&12 break before make, slow break (2) 6.6 ft (2m) cable (3)

XCS MP79L2

BU/WH

5

2-pole N.C. + N.C. slow break (2) 6.6 ft (2m) cable (3)

N.C. contact with positive opening operation) (1) XCS MP59L2

BU

4

References of switches without actuating key ( SROH1&12 break before make, slow break (2) 6.6 ft (2m) cable (3)

BU/WH

3

Weight oz (kg)

XCS MP70L2

XCS MP80L2

3.880 (0.110)

Complementary characteristicsQRWVKRZQXQGHUJHQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJHDQG

7

Actuation speed Resistance to forcible withdrawal of actuating key Connection Maximum operating rate Minimum force for extraction of key

Maximum: 59 in./s (1.5 m/s), minimum: 2 in./s (0.05 m/s) 1.8 lbs. (8 N) Pre-cabled, 4 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) or 6 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) For maximum life: 1200 operating cycles per hour 1.8 lbs. (8 N)

References of actuating keys Description

Straight key

Right-angled key

Pivoting key For right-hand door

For left-hand door

8

9

For switches XCS MP Weight oz (kg)

XCS Z81 0.529 (0.015)

XCS Z83 2.998 (0.085)

XCS Z85 2.998 (0.085)

Spare parts Description

10

XCS Z84 0.882 (0.025)

Unit reference

Weight oz (kg) 0.176 (0.005)

Blanking plugs XCS Z29 (Sold in lots of 10) (1) Blanking plug for operating head slot included with switch (2) Schematic diagrams shown represent the contact states while the operating key is inserted in the head of the switch. (3). Part numbers shown have a 6.6 ft. (2 m) cable. Other cable lengths are available: replace the 2 at the end of the part number with 5 for a 16.4 ft. (5m) cable, or with 10 for a 32.8 ft. (10 m) cable. Example: XCSMP59L2 becomes XCSMP59L10 for a switch with a 32.8 ft. (10 m) long cable. Principle: page 3/7

3/40

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/40

Dimensions: page 3/41

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/43

Dimensions

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated 3ODVWLFGRXEOHLQVXODWHG¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&603 Pre-cabled, length 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft (2, 5, or 10 m)

Dimensions XCS MP

XCS Z81 1.18 .59

.04

.79

15

1

20

30

1.41

1.11

35.9

28.2

.55 .04

8.4

.53

.14

14

13.5

3.5

1

1 .33

1.38

2xØ.35

35

2xØ9

2xØ.17

2

2xØ4.3

.22 3.07 Ø.17

5.6

.14

2.44

3.5

62

78

Ø4.4

3 XCS Z84

2.28 58

.20

.55

5

2xØ.17

.35

14

2xØ4.3

9

2xØ.35 .14

2xØ9

3.5

1.34

.55

34

14

4

.46

11.6

(1)

(1) Ø 0.29 in (7.6 mm); length 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft (2, 5, or 10 m).

1.33

.33

33.8

8.4

5

XCS Z83 .14 =

3.5

.98 25

=

1.34

6

34

=

=

(1)

.59 15

.51

1.11

13

28.2

.33 8.4

7 (1) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.2 x 6.

XCS Z85

=

.14 3.5

8

.33

9

.98

=

25

1.34 34

=

=

(1)

.59 15

.51

1.11

13

28.2

8.4

(1) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.2 x 6.

Dual Dimensions:

Principle: page 3/7

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/40

Dimensions: page 3/41

INCHES Millimieters

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/43

3/41

10

Dimensions, Functional diagrams

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated 3ODVWLFGRXEOHLQVXODWHG¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&603 Pre-cabled, length 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft (2, 5, or 10 m)

2SHUDWLQJUDGLXVUHTXLUHGIRUNH\

1

XCS Z81

XCS Z84

1

0m 60.3m 60

6m 9.0m 230230

30 m 6.0 m 60 16 1

.6 m 306 m 30 93 9

16

=

=

R=

R=

R

R

2 2.63 66,8

2.63 66,8

66.8

66.8

1.43 36,4

1.43 36,4

36.4

36.4

XCS Z83

XCS Z85

R

R

=

=

50

43.8

43.8

4

501. 9 50m7 m

97 m 1. m 50

97 m 1. m0 50 5

1.72 43,8

1.72 43,8

43.8

43.8

R

=

5

=

501. 97 50mm

1.72 43,8

1.72 43,8

R

3

Functional diagrams XCS MP59p

XCS MP79p

XCS MP70p

XCS MP80p

6 1.11 28.2

0.22 5.5

7

8

1.11

0.20

0.20

5.2

5.2

5.5

1.11

1.11

28.2

28.2

0.20 5.2

BU-BU/WH BN-BN/WH OG-OG/WH

BU-BU/WH OG-OG/WH

BU-BU/WH OG-OG/WH

Contact operation

28.2

0.22

Contact closed Contact open

0.20 5.2 BU-BU/WH BN-BN/WH OG-OG/WH

Dual Dimensions:

INCHES Millimieters

9

10 Principle: page 3/7

3/42

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/40

Dimensions: page 3/41

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/43

Wiring diagrams

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated 3ODVWLFGRXEOHLQVXODWHG¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&603 Pre-cabled, length 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft (2, 5, or 10 m)

Wiring diagrams :LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1 ,62 Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. contact and protective fuse to prevent jumpering of the N.C. contact, either by cable damage or by tampering.

:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62

1

Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.O. contact with mixed redundancy of the contacts and the associated control relays. Actuating key withdrawal and re-insertion necessary on power-up, in order to activate K1.

F1

F1 O

BU

K2 BU/WH

OG OG/WH

2

K1 OG

BN BN/WH

K1

OG/WH

BU BU/WH

(1)

KM1

I

O K2 K1

KM1 K1

I

3

KM2

K2 KM2

K1

K1

K2

4 M

M

(1) Signalling contact

5

:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62:LULQJPHWKRGXVHGLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWK3UHYHQWDŒVDIHW\UHOD\ WKHNH\HGVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKLVJHQHUDOO\XVHGLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKDVDIHW\OLPLWVZLWFK Method for machines with quick rundown time (low inertia) Locking or interlocking mechanism uses the principles of redundancy and autocheck. The safety relays help to ensure these functions.

6

XCS MP

7 XCS M

8 XPS Locking by actuating key and actuation in positive mode associated with a safety relay module

9

10 Principle: page 3/7

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/40

Dimensions: page 3/41

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/43

3/43

References, characteristics

Safety detection solution Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Plastic, turret head (1), types XCSPA, XCSTA and XCSTE Conduit entries tapped 1/2” NPT

Type of switch

Without locking of actuator

1

21 13 14

13

22

21

33 13 31

14

34

21

22 11

22 13 14

12 21 22

31

32

3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.C. (2) slow break

21

SROH1&1&12 (2) (N.O. staggered) slow break

32

4

22

SROH1&1212 (2) (2 N.O. staggered) slow break

21

2-pole N.C. + N.C. (2) slow break

11

3

22

SROH121& (2) make before break slow break

14

References of switches without actuating key ( SROH1&12 (2) break before make slow break

12

2

Weight oz (kg)

5

6

N.C. contact with positive opening operation)

XCSPA593

–

XCSPA693

–

XCSPA793

–

–

XCSTA593

–

XCSTA793

–

XCSTA893

3.880 (0.110)

5.644 (0.160)

Complementary characteristics not shown under General characteristics SDJHVDQG Actuation speed

Maximum: .19.6 in./s(0.5 m/s), minimum: 0.39 in./s (0.01 m/s)

Resistance to forcible withdrawal of actuator

XCSPA, XCSTA: 2.3 lbs (10 N) (11.3 lbs (50 N) using actuators XCSZ12 or XCSZ13 together with guard retaining device XCSZ21) XCSTE: 112 lbs (500 N)

Maximum operating rate

For maximum life: 600 operating cycles per hour

Minimum force for positive opening

3.4 lbs (15 N)

Cable entry

XCSPA: 1 entry tapped for 1/2” NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit. XCSTEHQWU\WDSSHGPPDQG¿WWHGZLWKPHWDODGDSWRU'(5$IRU” NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit. XCSTAHQWULHVWDSSHGPP¿WWHGZLWKPHWDODGDSWRU'(5$IRU” NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit. 6HFRQGHQWU\¿WWHGZLWKEODQNLQJSOXJ

Materials

Body: zamak. Head: zamak. Safety screws: 5-lobe torque. Protective plate: steel.

XCSZ91

Description

DF523736

7

809927

References of accessories

XCSZ200

8

For use with

Unit reference

Weight oz (kg)

Blanking plugs for operating head slot (Sold in lots of 10)

XCSPA, XCSTA, XCSTE

XCSZ28

1.764 (0.050)

Tool for forced opening of interlocking device (Sold in lots of 10)

XCSTE

XCSZ100

1.764 (0.050)

Padlocking device to prevent insertion of actuator, for up to 3 padlocks (padlocks not included)

XCSPA, XCSTA, XCSTE

XCSZ91

1.870 (0.053)

Actuator centering device (3) (Mounting screws included)

XCSPA, XCSTA, XCSTE

XCSZ200

0.776 (0.022)

(1) Head adjustable in 90° steps throughout 360°. Blanking plug for operating head slot included with switch. (2) Wiring diagrams shown represent the contact states while the actuating key is inserted in the head of the switch. (3) Do not use with XCSZ91.

9

The devices listed above are threaded for 1/2" NPT (using the supplied adaptor on the XCSTA), and are available with metric conduit: b To order devices tapped for 11 mm cable gland, conforming to NFC 68-300 (DIN Pg 11): Change the last character in the part number to 1. For example: XCSPA593 is changed to XCSPA591 b To order devices tapped for M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland: Change the last character in the part number to 2. For example: XCSPA593 is changed to XCSPA592

10 Principle: page 3/7

3/44

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/44

Dimensions: page 3/46

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/48

References, characteristics (continued)

Type of switch

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Plastic, turret head (1), types XCSPA, XCSTA and XCSTE Conduit entries tapped for 1/2” NPT With interlocking, locking by solenoid

1

Type of interlocking

Locking without power and unlocking on energization of solenoid (2). To order a guard switch with locking with power and unlocking on de-energization of the solenoid, replace the 2nd number (3) by 5 in the references shown below. Example: XCSTE5313 becomes XCSTE5513.

Supply voltage of solenoid

a or c 24 V (50/60 Hz on a)

21 13 14

13

22

21

21

22 11

22

2-pole N.C. + N.C. (3) slow break

12

SROH121& (3) make before break slow break

14

References of switches without actuating key ( SROH1&12 (3) break before make slow break

Weight oz (kg)

a or c 120 V (50/60 Hz on a)

2

a or c 230 V (50/60 Hz on a)

N.C. contact with positive opening operation)

XCSTE5313

XCSTE5333

XCSTE5343

XCSTE6313

XCSTE6333

XCSTE6343

XCSTE7313

XCSTE7333

XCSTE7343

3

4 12.7 (0.360)

12.7 (0.360)

12.7 (0.360)

a or c 120 V

a or c 230 V

Solenoid characteristics Load factor

100 %

Rated operational voltage

a or c 24 V

Voltage limits

- 20%, + 10% of the rated operational voltage (including ripple on c) conforming to EN/IEC 60947-1

Service life

20,000 hours

Power power consumption

10 VA max.

5

References of actuating keys and guard retaining device

6 Description

Straight actuator Actuator with wide mounting (5)

Pivoting actuator

Right-angled Guard retaining actuator device (4)

For interlock switches XCSPA, TA, TE

XCSZ11

XCSZ12

XCSZ15

XCSZ13

XCSZ14

XCSZ21

Weight oz (kg)

0.5 (0.015)

0.5 (0.015)

0.4 (0.012)

3.0 (0.085)

0.9 (0.025)

2.8 (0.080)

(1) Head adjustable in 90° steps throughout 360°. Blanking plug for operating head slot included with switch. (2) A special tool included with the guard switch enables forced opening of the interlocking mechanism, by authorized personnel, allowing withdrawal of the actuating key and subsequent opening of the N.C. safety contacts. (3) Wiring diagrams shown represent the contact states while the actuating key is inserted in the head of the switch. (4) Only for use with guard interlock switches XCSPA and XCSTA (without the actuator centering device XCSZ200), used in conjunction with actuators XCSZ12, XCSZ13 or XCSZ15. (5) 2 actuator lengths, XCSZ12: L = 1.57 in (40 mm), XCSZ15: L = 1.14 in (29 mm).

7

8

The devices listed above are threaded for 1/2" NPT (using the supplied adaptor on the XCSTA), and are available with metric conduit: b To order devices tapped for 11 mm cable gland, conforming to NFC 68-300 (DIN Pg 11): Change the last character in the part number to 1. For example: XCSTE5313 is changed to XCSTE5311 b To order devices tapped for M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland: Change the last character in the part number to 2. For example: XCSTE5313 is changed to XCSTE5312.

9

10 Principle: page 3/7

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/44

Dimensions: page 3/46

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/48

3/45

Dimensions

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Plastic, turret head, types XCSPA, XCSTA and XCSTE

Dimensions

1

XCSPAp91, XCSPAp92

XCSPAp93

0.28 7

0.28

1.18

30

1.18

30

2

1.18

30

7

1.18

30

1.54

1.34

39

34

1.54

1.34

39

34

3.68 93.5

3.68 93.5

0.53

3

13.5

0.79/0.87

0.79/0.87

20/22

(1)

0.52

=

=

1.18

4

1.18

30

XCSTAp9p

INCHES

Dual Dimensions:

1.18

30

(1) 1 tapped entry for cable gland Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3 mm) on 0.87 in (22 mm) centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17 in (4.3 mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers

20/22

=

13.2

(1)

1.18

30

=

0.52

13.2

Millimieters

30

(1) 1 tapped entry for 1/2" NPT conduit Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3 mm) on 0.87 in (22 mm) centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17 in (4.3 mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers XCSTEpppp

0.28

5

7

0.28

1.18

7

30

0.59

1.18

15

30

1.34

1.54

(3)

34

39

1.70

1.50

43

38

6

3.68

4.51

93.5

114.5

0.49 12.5

7

14.5

20/22

0.49

(1)

0.57

0.79/0.87 (1)

1.59

1.18

0.16 4

4.33 110

40.3

30

40

20/22

33

12.5

1.57

0.79/0.87

1.30

2.05 52

8

(1) 2 tapped entries for cable gland or 1/2" NPT conduit adaptor (2) 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3 mm) on 0.87 in (22 mm) centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17 in (4.3 mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers (3) 2 elongated holes Ø 0.21 x 0.52 in (5.3 x 13.3 mm)

137FRQGXLWDGDSWRU

M16 x 1.5 adaptor

Actuator centering device

DE9 RA1012

DE9 RA1016

XCSZ200

0.83

0.51

(1)

21

9

(1) 1 tapped entry for cable gland or 1/2" NPT conduit adaptor Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3 mm) on 0.87 in (22 mm) centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17 in (4.3 mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers

13

0.71

0.94

26

17.4

0.25

24

1.18 (1) Tapped entry for 1/2" NPT conduit (2) Pg 11 threaded shank

(1) M16 x 1.5 tapped entry (2) Pg 11 threaded shank

18

0.16 4 0.23

0.69

1.02

0.22

5.8

6.4

1.39

5.5

35.35

29.85

0.25

2 x Ø 0.22

6.4

2 x Ø 5.5

0.69 17.4

10

1.18 29.85

2 x Ø 0.12 2xØ3 Dual Dimensions:

Principle: page 3/7

3/46

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/44

Dimensions: page 3/46

INCHES Millimieters

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/48

Dimensions (continued)

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Plastic, turret head, types XCSPA, XCSTA and XCSTE

Dimensions (continued) XCSZ11

XCSZ12, XCSZ15 Adaptor shank (1)

1

0.43 11

2.56 0.87

0.19

L

2

==

5

0.87

0.08

6

0.20

37

2

22

4.7

1.02

=

22

0.24

1.46

0.08

65

0.51

26

13

0.47

0.59

0.47

12

0.51

1.57

12

15

2

2.17

13

40

0.19

0.59

55

4.7

=

15

(1) Adaptor (included with actuating key XCSZ11) for replacing, without drilling additional mounting hole, an XCK T with actuating key XCK Y01 by a safety interlock switch XCSTA with actuating key XCSZ11. Ø a: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.19 x 0.39 in (4.7 x 10 mm) Ø b: 1 elongated hole for M4 or M4.5 screw XCSZ13

0.08 2

Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.19 x 0.39 in (4.7 x 10 mm) L = 1.57 in (40 mm) (XCSZ12) or 1.14 in (29 mm) (XCSZ15) XCSZ14 0.47

3

1.67

12

42.5

2.05

0.08

0.59

52

15

2

0.24

1.06

1.67

0.20

6

27

=

0.19

13

1.02

4.7

1.38

26

2.17

35

4

2

22

0.51

42.5

0.08

0.87

5

0.47

0.51

55

12

13

1.02 =

26

5

0.91 23

1.26

1.12

32

28.5

2.60 66

Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.19 x 0.39 in (4.7 x 10 mm)

Ø: 1 elongated hole Ø 0.19 x 0.39 in (4.7 x 10 mm)

2SHUDWLQJUDGLXVUHTXLUHGIRUDFWXDWRU XCSZ11

6

XCSZ12, XCSZ15

471200

.24

06 591.500

6 .0 0 59150

4 .2 0 47120

=

2.80

71

R=

=

R=

R

R

2.80

7

d

71

d

8

d = 1.81 in (46 mm) (XCSZ12) or 1.38 in (35 mm) (XCSZ15) XCSZ14

XCSZ13

R=

06 591.500

.24 471200

R=

1 .8 11 300

91 5. 150

=

=

R

R

9

1.89 2.83 72

10

48

2.83

1.89

72

48

R = minimum radius Principle: page 3/7

Dual Dimensions:

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/44

Dimensions: page 3/46

INCHES Millimieters

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/48

3/47

Setting-up, Wiring diagrams

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Plastic, turret head, types XCSPA, XCSTA and XCSTE

Setting-up

1

2

Functional diagrams XCSPA5pp, XCSTE5ppp

XCSPA6pp, XCSTE6ppp

XCSPA7pp, XCSTE7ppp

XCSTA5pp,

XCSTA7pp,

0.94

0.94

0.94

0.94

0.94

24

0.73

0.67

18.5

24

0.59

17

0.67 17

15

0.63

3

0.67

18.5

0.73

17.5

0.67

16

0.73

17

21-22

21-22 0.69

24

Contact operation G Contact closed

H Contact open

Setting-up

0.67

24

0.75 19

0.75

0.67

19

17

17

21-22 31-32

21-22

11-12 21-22

0.75

18.5

17

13-14

24

0.63

19

16

13-14

0.69

0.63

13-14 33-34

17.5

16

13-14

Dual Dimensions:

G Contacts in transition

INCHES Millimieters

Wiring diagrams Note: These wiring diagrams are given as examples only, the designer must refer to the relevant safety standards for guidance

Functional diagrams XCSTA8pp

Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O. contact and protection fuse to prevent jumpering of the N.C. contact, either by cable damage or by tampering.

0.94 24

Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.O. contact with mixed redundancy of the contacts and the associated control relays. To activate K1, it is necessary to remove and re-insert the actuator when the supply is switched on.

F1 O

17

Contact operation G Contact closed H Contact open G Contact in transition

K1

21

13

(1)

K2 KM1

22

33

K1

14

13

34

11-12 21-22

14

16.5

31-32

6

:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1 ,62

F1

0.67

21

5

0.65

22

4

:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1 ,62

I

O K2

KM2

KM1

X

I

K1

K2 KM2

X

7

K1

K2

M

M

(1) Signalling contact

8

:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62 :LULQJPHWKRGXVHGLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKVDIHW\UHOD\PRGXOH (The guard interlock switch should be used in conjunction with a safety limit switch to give electrical/mechanical redundancy) Method for machines with quick rundown time (low inertia) Locking or interlocking device based on the principle of redundancy and self-monitoring.

Method for machines with long rundown time (high inertia)

9 XPS

XPS VNE

XPS

10 Locking of actuator and operation in positive mode associated with a safety relay module. Principle: page 3/7

3/48

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/44

,QWHUORFNLQJGHYLFHIRUDFWXDWRU¿WWHGRQJXDUGDQG]HURVSHHG detection. Dimensions: page 3/46

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/48

Wiring diagrams (continued)

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches, actuator operated Plastic, turret head, type XCSTE

Wiring diagrams (continued) :LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62 Wiring examples with protection fuse to prevent jumpering of the N.C. contact, either by cable damage or by tampering Locking without power 1&12 XCSTE53pp

Locking with power 1&12 XCSTE55pp

F1

F1

2 (1)

(1)

(2)

E1

E2

1

(32)

21

22

13

14

(2)

E1

31 33

E2

31

(34)

21

22

13

14

3

33

4

O

O

I

X

I

X

M

M

X

X

(1) Solenoid (2) Auxiliary contact E1-E2: Solenoid supply 13-14: Safety contact, available for redundancy or signalling

(1) Solenoid (2) Auxiliary contact E1-E2: Solenoid supply 13-14: Safety contact, available for redundancy or signalling

5

:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62 Wiring examples with redundancy for the guard switch contacts, without monitoring Locking without power N.C. + N.C. XCSTE73pp

Locking with power N.C. + N.C. XCSTE75pp

F1

6

F1

F2

F2

(1) K2

K2

(2) (34)

21

22

11

12

O

(2)

(32)

21

22

11

12

O

E2 31

33

E1

I

E2

31 33 I

KM2

KM2

KM1

KM1

KM2

KM2

M

M

K1

K1

K2

(1) Solenoid (2) Solenoid auxiliary contact E1-E2: Solenoid supply 11-12: Safety contact, available for redundancy

Principle: page 3/7

Characteristics: page 3/22

8

KM1

KM1 E1

7

K1

K1

(1)

K2

(1) Solenoid (2) Solenoid auxiliary contact E1-E2: Solenoid supply 11-12: Safety contact, available for redundancy

References: page 3/45

Dimensions: page 3/46

9

10 Wiring Diagrams: page 3/49

3/49

Presentation

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches with lever or shaft operator Plastic, double insulated, turret head, types XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR and XCSTR

XCSPL with 1 conduit entry

:LWKURWDU\RSHUDWLQJKHDGZLWKHOERZHGOHYHUÀXVKZLWKUHDURIVZLWFK RU straight lever, for hinged covers and guards

1

2

Page 3/52

3 XCSPR with 1 conduit entry

With rotary operating head, with rotary shaft, for hinged covers and guards

4

5 Page 3/52

XCSTL with 2 conduit entries

:LWKURWDU\RSHUDWLQJKHDGZLWKHOERZHGOHYHUÀXVKZLWKUHDURIVZLWFK RU straight lever, for hinged covers and guards

6

7

8

Page 3/52

XCSTR with 2 conduit entries

With rotary operating head, with rotary shaft, for hinged covers and guards

9

10 Page 3/52

3/50

Characteristics

Safety detection solutions Safety interlock switches with lever or shaft operator Plastic, double insulated, turret head, types XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR and XCSTR

Environment characteristics Conformity to standards 3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV Protective treatment Ambient air temperature

Products Machine assemblies

For operation For storage

Vibration resistance Shock resistance Electric shock protection Degree of protection Cable entry Materials

EN/IEC 60947-5-1, EN/IEC 60947-5-4, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 EN/IEC 60204-1, EN 1088/ISO 14119, EN/ISO 12100 UL, CSA, BG Standard version: “TC” and “TH” -13…+158 °F (- 25…+70 °C) -40…+158 °F (- 40…+70 °C) 50 gn (10…500 Hz) conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 50 gn (duration 11 ms) conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Class 2 conforming to IEC 60536 ,3FRQIRUPLQJWR,(& Depending on model, either: 1 tapped entry for n° 11 (Pg 11) cable gland, tapped M16 x 1.5 or tapped 1/2" NPT 3RO\DPLGH3$¿EHUJODVVLPSUHJQDWHGFDVH Stainless steel lever and mountings

2 and 3 contact versions slow break

Rated insulation voltage

2 and 3 contact versions

Rated impulse withstand voltage

2 and 3 contact versions

Positive operation

2

3

Contact block characteristics Rated operational characteristics

1

XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR, XCSTR: a AC-15, A300: Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A or Ue = 120 V, Ie = 6 A All models: c DC-13, Q300: Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.27 A or Ue = 125 V, Ie = 0.55 A conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR, XCSTR : Ui = 500 V conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Ui = 300 V conforming to UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR, XCSTR: Uimp = 6 kV conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1

4

N.C. contacts with positive opening operation conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 Section 3 y 30 m1 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-4

Resistance across terminals Short-circuit protection

2 and 3 contact versions

Connection

2 contact version

Minimum actuation speed

3 contact version

XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR, XCSTR: 10 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl) XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR, XCSTR: Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 21 AWG (0.5 mm2), max: 2 x 15 AWG (1.5 mm2) with or without cable end 0.39 in./s (0.01 m/s)

5

Electrical life Conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix C. Utilisation categories AC-15 and DC-13. Maximum operating rate: 3600 operating cycles/hour. Load factor: 0.5

6

Millions of operating cycles

2 and 3 slow break contact versions a.c. supply a 50/60 Hz o inductive circuit

5 4 3

Ithe 230 V

2

12/24/48 V

7

110 V

1 0,5

0,2 0,1 0,5

1

2

3 4 5

10

Current in A

8

d.c. supply c Power broken in W for 1 million operating cycles Voltage o

V W

24 13

48 9

120 7

Electrical Life The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the limited warranty offered on this product please refer to the Square D ® terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D ® Digest.

9

10

3/51

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

References, characteristics

Safety interlock switches with lever or shaft operator Plastic, double insulated, turret head, types XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR and XCSTR Conduit entries tapped 1/2” NPT

Type

(OERZHGOHYHUÀXVKZLWKUHDURIVZLWFK

6WUDLJKWOHYHU

6SLQGOH

To left

To right

To right OR to left

Centered

Length 1.18 in (30 mm) (2)

1

2 2SHUDWRU

13

21

XCSPL553

XCSPR553

XCSPL793

XCSPL783

XCSPL773

XCSPL763

XCSPL753

XCSPR753

:HLJKWR]NJ

3.351 (0.095)

3.351 (0.095)

3.351 (0.095)

3.351 (0.095)

3.351 (0.095)

3.704 (0.105)

2SHUDWRU

To left

Centered

To right

To right OR to left

Centered

Length 1.18 in (30 mm) (2)

2-pole N.C. + N.C. slow break

4

22

XCSPL563

21

XCSPL573

11

XCSPL583

12

XCSPL593

22

3

1&FRQWDFWZLWKSRVLWLYHRSHQLQJRSHUDWLRQ

2-pole N.C. + N.O. break before make slow break

14

5HIHUHQFHV(

Centered

5

:HLJKWR]NJ

8

33 34

31

13

13

14

21

31 32

14

21 22

32

3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.C. slow break

21

3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) slow break

11

7

22

1&FRQWDFWZLWKSRVLWLYHRSHQLQJRSHUDWLRQ

12

5HIHUHQFHV(

3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O. staggered) slow break

22

6

–

XCSTL583

–

XCSTL563

XCSTL553

XCSTR553

XCSTL793

XCSTL783

XCSTL773

XCSTL763

XCSTL753

XCSTR753

–

XCSTL883

XCSTL873

XCSTL863

–

XCSTR853

5.115 (0.145)

5.115 (0.145)

5.115 (0.145)

5.115 (0.145)

5.115 (0.145)

5.467 (0.155)

&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHU*HQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJHVDQG 7ULSSLQJDQJOH

5°

0HFKDQLFDOOLIH

PLOOLRQRSHUDWLQJF\FOHV

0LQLPXPWRUTXH

For tripping: 0.07 lb-ft; for positive opening: 0.18 lb-ft (XCSPL and XCSPR), 0.33 lb-ft (XCSTL and XCSTR) XCSPp: 1 entry tapped for 1/2” NPT conduit XCSTp: 2 entries tapped for n° 11 cable gland conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 11). with one DE9RA1012 conduit adaptor for 1/2” NPT

&DEOHHQWU\

9

(1) Head adjustable in 90° steps throughout 360°. Switches supplied with 2 additional self-locking screws for positive mounting of the head. (2) For switches with 3.15 in. (80 mm) spindle: replace the 2nd number in the reference (5) by 6. Example: XCSPR553 becomes XCSPR563.. The weight increases by 1.1 oz. (0.032 kg.)

10

The devices listed above are threaded for 1/2" NPT, (using the supplied adaptor on the XCST) and are available with metric conduit: b To order devices tapped for 11 mm cable gland, conforming to NFC 68-300 (DIN Pg 11): Change the last character in the part number to 1. For example: XCSPL593 is changed to XCSPL591. b To order devices tapped for M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland: Change the last character in the part number to 2.For example: XCSPL593 is changed to XCSPL592.

Principle: page 3/7

3/52

Characteristics: page 3/22

References: page 3/52

Dimensions: page 3/53

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/53

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Operation, dimensions, wiring diagrams

Safety interlock switches with lever or shaft operator Plastic, double insulated, turret head, types XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR and XCSTR Conduit entries tapped for 1/2” NPT conduit

2SHUDWLRQ 2SHUDWRUGLVSODFHPHQW XCSPLp93, PLp73, PLp63

XCSPLp83, PLp53

XCSTLp93, TLp73, TLp63

XCSTLp83, TLp53

XCSPRp53

XCSTRp53

XCSTL583, TL553

XCSPR553

XCSTR553

1

or

or

)XQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPV XCSPL593, PL573, PL563

-5˚+5˚ -90˚ 0 +90˚

180˚

XCSTL563 5˚ 0

180˚

21-22 13-14

21-22 13-14

XCSPL793, PL773, PL763 180°

-5°+5° 0 +90°

-90°

11-12 21-22

XCSTL793, TL773, TL763 5˚ 0

XCSTL783, TL753 -90˚

180˚

11-12 21-22

-5˚ +5˚ 0 +90˚

XCSTL873, TL863

G contact closed H contact open

5° 0

180°

XCSPR753 -270°

XCSTL883, TL853

10˚

4

-5°+5° -270° 0 +270°

11-12 21-22 31-32

11-12 21-22 31-32

:LULQJGLDJUDPV XCSTLpp3

&DWHJRU\WR(1,62 70

0.10

16

0.10

2.5

0.21

2.5

2.85 72.5 1.69

5.3

2.5

4.27

(3)

108,35

1.30

1.10

(2)

0.49

0.92

33

28

33

28

72.5

70

21

2.85

2.76

1.30

1.10

22

43

5.3

12.5

23.35

0.53 13.5

0.92

(1)

23.35

12.5

0.79/0.87

13.2

20/22

30

30

30

(1) 1 tapped entry for 1/2” NPT conduit Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3 mm) on 0.87 in (22 mm) centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17 in (4.3 mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers

INCHES

M4

0.47

32.1

0.31

5

M4

28

1.10

2x

41.75

0.13

3.79 0.51 0.87

2x

0.13 0.33 8.5 0.51 13 0.87 (3) 22

4.61 117

0.49

0.33

96.25

K2

12.5

8.5

0.53 13.5

13

41.75

K1

(2)

K1

22

0.49

(1) 0.52

0.79/0.87

13.2

20/22

12.5

1.18 1.18

30

0.79/0.87 20/22 1.59 40.3 2.05 52

30

(1) 1 tapped entry for 1/2” NPT conduit Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3 mm) on 0.87 in (22 mm) centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17 in (4.3 mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers L = 1.18 in (30 mm) (XCSPRp53) or 3.15 in (80 mm) (XCSPRp63) Principle: page 3/7

I

1.64

Characteristics: page 3/22

(1) 2 tapped entries for n° 11 cable gland (2) 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3 mm) on 0.87 in (22 mm) centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17 in (4.3 mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers (3) 2 elongated holes Ø 0.21 x 0.52 in (5.3 x 13.3 mm) L = 1.18 in (30 mm) (XCSTRp53) or 3.15 in (80 mm) (XCSTRp63) References: page 3/52

K2

K2

8

KM1

1.10

5

1.64

K1 K2

0.31

0.20

1.26

KM2

KM1 H1

M KM2

To activate K1, the lever or spindle must be rotated when the supply is switched on. H1: “lever or spindle displaced from initial position” indicator. When used in conjunction with an XPSsafety relay module and another safety switch, the rotary lever or spindle operator guard switch can provide a category 3 or 4 control and monitoring system for moving guards to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1.

Dimensions: page 3/53

7

O 13

0.47

28

30

F1 K1

L

0.20

1.18

([DPSOHZLWKSROH1&1212FRQWDFW ZLWKPL[HGUHGXQGDQF\RIWKHFRQWDFWVDQGWKH DVVRFLDWHGFRQWUROUHOD\V

(1) 2 tapped entries for n° 11 cable gland (2) 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3 mm) on 0.87 in (22 mm) centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17 in (4.3 mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers (3) 22 elongated holes Ø 0.21 x 0.52 in (5.3 x 13.3 mm)

30

(1)

&DWHJRU\WR(1,62

Millimieters

XCSTRpp3 1.18

M

X

14

XCSPRpp3

X

52

Dual Dimensions:

1.18

1.18

I

0.79/0.87 20/22 1.59 40.3 2.05

0.49 1.18

0.52

6

O

3.44 87.5

5

F1

43

1.69

0.21

33

0.10

([DPSOHZLWKFDEOHVKRUWFLUFXLWSURWHFWLRQ IXVH

34

27.4

16

13

27.4

0.63

1.08

0.63

2.76

14

1.08

32.1

21-22 31-32 13-14

XCSTR853

-5°+5° 0 +90°

-90°

3

+5˚ -5˚ 0 +270˚

10˚

11-12 21-22 31-32

XCSPLpp3

1.26

-270˚

11-12 21-22

'LPHQVLRQV

(1)

XCSTR753

+5° -5° 0 +270°

21-22 31-32 13-14

21-22 31-32 13-14

10˚

&RQWDFWRSHUDWLRQ

10˚

21

5° 0

XCSPL783, PL753

21-22 13-14 33-34

21-22 13-14

10˚

10˚

10˚

2

+5˚+5˚ -5˚ +270˚ -270˚ 0 +270˚

-5˚+5˚ -270˚ 0 +270˚

21-22 13-14 33-34

21-22 13-14 33-34

10˚

10˚

-5˚+5˚ -90˚ 0 +90˚

22

5˚ 0

XCSPL583, PL553

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/53

3/53

9

10

Presentation

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV Non-contact safety interlock switches Plastic

XCSDMC

5HFWDQJXODUFRPSDFW[[LQ[[PP 3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ

1

&RQQHFWRURQSLJWDLOFRQQHFWLRQ

2

3 3/56 and 3/57

XCSDMP

5HFWDQJXODUVWDQGDUG[[LQ[[PP 3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ

4

&RQQHFWRURQSLJWDLOFRQQHFWLRQ

5

6 3/56 and 3/57

7 XCSDMR

&\OLQGULFDOGLDPHWHULQPP OHQJWKLQPP 3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ

8

9 3/56 and 3/57

10

3/54

&RQQHFWRURQSLJWDLOFRQQHFWLRQ

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Characteristics

Non-contact safety interlock switches Plastic

(QYLURQPHQW &RQIRUPLW\WRVWDQGDUGV

Products

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22 2 n° 14

Machine assemblies

IEC/EN 60204-1, EN/ISO 12100, EN 1088/ISO 14119 (XCSDMp5pp only)

3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV

UL-CSA, BG

3URWHFWLYHWUHDWPHQW

Standard version: “TH”

$PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH

For operation

ƒ)ƒ&

-13…+185 (- 25…+ 85)

For storage

ƒ)ƒ&

-40…+185 (- 40…+ 85)

2

9LEUDWLRQUHVLVWDQFH

10 gn (10…150 Hz) conforming to IEC 60068-2-6

6KRFNUHVLVWDQFH

30 gn (11 ms) conforming to IEC 60068-2-7

6HQVLWLYLW\WRPDJQHWLF¿HOGV

mT

(OHFWULFVKRFNSURWHFWLRQ

1

3

* 0.3 Class II conforming to IEC 60536

'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ

Conforming to IEC 60529

IP 66 and IP 67 for non-contact safety interlock switches with pre-cabled connection IP 67 for non-contact safety interlock switches with connector on pigtail connection Thermoplastic case (PBT) PVC cable (ROHS)

0DWHULDOV

&RQWDFWEORFNFKDUDFWHULVWLFV 5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV

Ue: c 24 V, Ie: 100 mA max.

5DWHGLQVXODWLRQYROWDJH(Ui)

Ui: c 100 V

5DWHGLPSXOVHZLWKVWDQGYROWDJH(U imp) 5HVLVWDQFHDFURVVWHUPLQDOV

N9

2.5 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1

Contact with LED

1

57

Contact without LED

1

10

5

3URWHFWLRQ(not using safety module)

External cartridge fuse: 500 mA gG (gl)

&RQQHFWLRQ

&RQWDFWPDWHULDO

Pre-cabled, 4 x 22 AWG, length: 2, 5 or 10 m depending on model or M8 connector on 5.95 in. (0.15 m) pigtail Pre-cabled, 4 x 22 AWG, length: 2, 5 or 10 m depending on model or M12 connector on 5.95 in. (0.15 m) pigtail Pre-cabled, 6 x 22 AWG, length: 2, 5 or 10 m depending on model or M12 connector on 5.95 in. (0.15 m) pigtail Pre-cabled, 4 x 22 AWG, length: 2, 5 or 10 m depending on model or M12 connector on 5.95 in. (0.15 m) pigtail Rhodium

(OHFWULFDOOLIH

1.2 million operating cycles

XCSDMC XCSDMP 2 contact model 3 contact model XCSDMR

V

c 100

Contact with LED

mA

5…100

Contact without LED

mA

0.1…100

MW

1000

Contact with LED

VA

3

Contact without LED

VA

10

+]

150

0D[LPXPVZLWFKLQJYROWDJH 6ZLWFKLQJFDSDFLW\

,QVXODWLRQUHVLVWDQFH 0D[LPXPEUHDNLQJFDSDFLW\

0D[LPXPVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQF\

4

6

7

8

9

10 Characteristics: Page 3/55

References: Page 3/56

Accessories: Page 3/58

Dimensions: Page 3/60

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/61

3/55

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

References, characteristics

Non-contact safety interlock switches Plastic, pre-cabled

5HFWDQJXODU

Type

Compact 2.01 x 0.63 x 0.28 in (51 x 16 x 7 mm)

1

&\OLQGULFDO Standard 3.46 x 0.98 x 0.51 in (88 x 25 x 13 mm)

Diameter: 1.18 in (30 mm) Length: 1.51 in (38.5 mm)

2

3 5HIHUHQFHVRIVZLWFKHV(1)PXVWEHXVHGLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWK;36VDIHW\UHOD\PRGXOHVVHHSDJHVWR

8

9

BN

XCSDMC7902

XCSDMP7902

XCSDMR7902

–

XCSDMP5002

–

–

XCSDMP7002

–

XCSDMC5912

XCSDMP5912

XCSDMR5912

XCSDMC7912

XCSDMP7912

XCSDMR7912

–

XCSDMP5012

–

–

XCSDMP7012

–

BN BU

XCSDMR5902

WH BK

BN BU

WH PK

BN BK

BU BU

BU

BN

+

BN

+

Weight oz (kg) 3.563 (0.101) 6.349 (0.180) 5.150 (0.146) (1) Magnetic switch + coded magnet (XCSZCpppp). Switch pre-cabled with 6.6 ft.(2m) long cable. For other cable lengths, replace the last number of the reference (2) by 5 for a 16.4 ft. (5 m) long cable or by 10 for a 32.8 ft. (10 m) long cable. Example: XCSDMC5902 rectangular, compact switch with N.C. + N.O. contacts and 10 m cable becomes XCSDMC59010. (2) Only to be wired in conjunction with an XPSAF module (see pages 3/63 and 3/65). (3) The green LED is lit when the coded magnet is positioned in front of the switch (guard closed). ·N.O. contact PK-GY is to be used as an indicator of the device state, typically to a PLC. It is not to be used for the safety function.

&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHU*HQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJH 2SHUDWLQJ]RQH

Sao: 0.20 in (5 mm) Sar: 0.59 in. (15 mm) 3 directions

$SSURDFKGLUHFWLRQV

10

BN BU

GY PK

3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2) (3) (1 N.O. staggered) With LED

BK

7

3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (3) (1 N.C. staggered) With LED

XCSDMP5902

+

WH BU

2-pole N.O. + N.O. (2) (3) (1 N.O. staggered) With LED

+

GY BK

2-pole N.C. + N.O. (3) (N.C. staggered) With LED

WH BK

3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2) (1 N.O. staggered)

6

WH BK

3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (1 N.C. staggered)

GY PK

5

GY BK

2-pole N.O. + N.O. (2) (1 N.O. staggered)

XCSDMC5902

BN

WH BK

2-pole N.C. + N.O. (N.C. staggered)

PK

4

WH BU

WH

&RQWDFWVWDWHVVKRZQDUHZLWKWKHPDJQHWSRVLWLRQHGLQIURQWRIWKHVZLWFK

Sao: 0.31 in. (8 mm) Sar: 0.79 in. (20 mm) 3 directions

Sao: 0.31 in. (8 mm) 0.79 in. (20 mm) 1 direction

$FFHVVRULHVSDJH Characteristics: Page 3/55

3/56

References: Page 3/56

Accessories: Page 3/58

Dimensions: Page 3/60

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/61

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

References, characteristics

Non-contact safety interlock switches Plastic, connector on 5.9 in (151 mm) pigtail

(continued)

5HFWDQJXODU

Type

&\OLQGULFDO

Compact 2.01 x 0.63 x 0.28 in (51 x 16 x 7 mm)

Standard 3.46 x 0.98 x 0.51 in (88 x 25 x 13 mm)

Diameter: 1.18 in (30 mm) Length: 1.51 in (38.5 mm)

0FRQQHFWRU

0FRQQHFWRU

0FRQQHFWRU

1

2

3 5HIHUHQFHVRIVZLWFKHV(1)PXVWEHXVHGLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWK;36VDIHW\UHOD\PRGXOHVVHHSDJHVWR 1 3 1

XCSDMC790L01M8

XCSDMP790L01M12

XCSDMR790L01M12

–

XCSDMP500L01M12

–

–

XCSDMP700L01M12

–

XCSDMC591L01M8

XCSDMP591L01M12

XCSDMR591L01M12

XCSDMC791L01M8

XCSDMP791L01M12

XCSDMR791L01M12

–

XCSDMP501L01M12

–

–

XCSDMP701L01M12

–

4

3

5

3

1

3

XCSDMR590L01M12

4

3

1

1

3

1

6

7

3

7

7

3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2) (3) (1 N.O. staggered) With LED

2

3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (3) (1 N.C. staggered) With LED

6

6

4

2-pole N.O. + N.O. (2) (3) (1 N.O. staggered) With LED

XCSDMP590L01M12

1

4 4

2 4

2

6 7

6

2

4

2-pole N.C. + N.O. (3) (N.C. staggered) With LED

1 4

2 7

3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2) (1 N.O. staggered)

XCSDMC590L01M8

3

3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (1 N.C. staggered)

2

2-pole N.O. + N.O. (2) (1 N.O. staggered)

4

2-pole N.C. + N.O. (N.C. staggered)

2

2

&RQWDFWVWDWHVVKRZQDUHZLWKWKHPDJQHWSRVLWLRQHGLQIURQWRIWKHVZLWFK

Weight oz (kg) 3.563 (0.101) 6.349 (0.180) (1) Magnetic switch + coded magnet (XCSZCpppp). (2) Only to be wired in conjunction with an XPSAF module (see pages 3/63 and 3/65). (3) The green LED is lit when the coded magnet is positioned in front of the switch (guard closed). N.O. contact PK-GY is to be used as an indicator of the device state, typically to a PLC. It is not to be used for the safety function.

5.150 (0.146)

8

&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHU*HQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJH 2SHUDWLQJ]RQH

Sao: 0.20 in (5 mm) Sar: 0.59 in. (15 mm) 3 directions

$SSURDFKGLUHFWLRQV

Sao: 0.31 in. (8 mm) Sar: 0.79 in. (20 mm) 3 directions

9

Sao: 0.31 in. (8 mm) Sar: 0.79 in. (20 mm) 1 direction

$FFHVVRULHVSDJH

Characteristics: Page 3/55

References: Page 3/56

10 Accessories: Page 3/58

Dimensions: Page 3/60

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/61

3/57

References, characteristics

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

(continued)

Accessories

Non-contact safety interlock switches

$FFHVVRULHV

1

2

$FFHVVRULHVIRUQRQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFN VZLWFKHV

XCSDMCppp2 XCSDMCpppL

XCSDMPppp2 XCSDMPpppL

XCSDMRppp2 XCSDMRpppL

0RXQWLQJFODPS :HLJKWR]NJ

– –

$GGLWLRQDOFRGHGPDJQHW :HLJKWR]NJ

XCSZC1 0.317 (0.009)

XCSZP1 1.764 (0.050)

XCSZR1 0.635 (0.018)

1RQPDJQHWLFVKLPV :HLJKWR]NJ

XCSZCC (lot of 2) 0.282 (0.008)

XCSZCP (lot of 2) 0.423 (0.012)

XCSZCR 0.071 (0.002)

XSZ B130 2.822 (0.080)

3UHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRUVIRUFRQQHFWRUYHUVLRQVZLWFKHV 3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUFKDUDFWHULVWLFV

3

3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUW\SH 7\SHRIFRQQHFWLRQ 1XPEHURIFRQGXFWRUVSLQV 'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ $PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH

4

5

Static Dynamic

&DEOLQJ

/('VLJQDOOLQJ 1RPLQDOYROWDJH 1RPLQDOFXUUHQW ,QVXODWLRQUHVLVWDQFH &RQWDFWUHVLVWDQFH

XZCP0941Lp, XZCP1041Lp XZCP29P11Lp Screw threaded (metal Screw threaded (metal clamping ring) clamping ring) 4 8 IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened) - 31…+ 194 °F (- 35…+ 90 °C) - 31…+ 194 °F (- 35…+ 90 °C) + 23…+ 194 °F (- 5…+ 90 °C) + 23…+ 194 °F (- 5…+ 90 °C) Ø 0.205” (5.2 mm) cable, Ø 0.205” (5.2 mm) cable, wire c.s.a.: wire c.s.a.: 2 8 x 24 AWG (0.25 mm2) 4 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm )

XZCP1141Lp, XZCP1241Lp Screw threaded (metal clamping ring) 4

– a 60 V, c 75 V 4A > 109 1 y 5 m1

– a 250 V, c 300 V 4A > 109 1 y 5 m1

– a 250 V, c 300 V 2A > 109 1 y 5 m1

- 31…+ 194 °F (- 35…+ 90 °C) + 23…+ 194 °F (- 5…+ 90 °C) Ø 0.205” (5.2 mm) cable, wire c.s.a.: 4 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2)

5HIHUHQFHVRISUHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUV 7\SHRI FRQQHFWRU

6

Female, M8

1XPEHU )RUXVHZLWK RISLQV 4

XCSDMCpppL

&DEOH OHQJWK IWP Straight 6.56 (2) Type

16.40 (5)

5HIHUHQFH

XZCP0941L2 XZCP0941L5

32.81 (10) XZCP0941L10

XZ CP0941Lp

Elbowed 6.56 (2)

7

16.40 (5)

XZCP1041L2 XZCP1041L5

32.81 (10) XZCP1041L10 XZ CP1041Lp

Female, M12

8

XCSDMPpppL

Straight 6.56 (2) 16.40 (5)

8

XZCP29P11L2 XZCP29P11L5

32.81 (10) XZCP29P11L10 Female, M12

XZ CP29P11Lp

4

XCSDMRpppL/ XCSDMPpppL

Straight 6.56 (2) 16.40 (5)

9

XZCP1141L2 XZCP1141L5

32.81 (10) XZCP1141L10 Elbowed 6.56 (2) 16.40 (5)

XZCP1241L5

6.702 (0.190)

XZ CP1241Lp

3/58

References: Page 3/56

Accessories: Page 3/58

Dimensions: Page 3/60

12.699 (0.360) 2.822 (0.080) 6.349 (0.180) 12.699 (0.360) 3.527 (0.100) 10.229 (0.290) 16.579 (0.470) 3.175 (0.090) 6.702 (0.190) 13.051 (0.370) 3.175 (0.090)

XZ CP1141Lp

Characteristics: Page 3/55

R]NJ 2.822 (0.080) 6.349 (0.180)

XZCP1241L2

32.81 (10) XZCP1241L10

10

:HLJKW

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/61

13.051 (0.370)

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Function diagrams

Non-contact safety interlock switches

)XQFWLRQGLDJUDPVZLWKPDJQHWSUHVHQWSUHFDEOHGYHUVLRQ XCSDMC59pp 0

Color (N.O.): BN/BU (N.C.): BK/WH

0.55

0.20

14

5

XCSDMC79pp

Sao F O

0.55

0 0.20 5

14

Sao F F

Sar

8

0.79 0.55

20

Color

0

0.79

0.31 8

0.55

20

0

20

14

F O O

8

Sao

Color Sar (N.O.): BN/BU (N.O.): BK/WH (N.C.): GY/PK

0.79

0.31 0.55

1

20

14

F F O

2

Color

Sar (N.O.): BN/BU

14

Sao

(N.C.): BK/WH

F O

Sao

0.55

XCSDMR79pp;&6'03pp

Sar (N.O.): BN/BU

14

8

Color Sar (N.O.): BN/BU (N.C.): BK/WH (N.C.): GY/PK

0.79

0.31

15

XCSDMR59pp;&6'03pp 0.31

0

XCSDMP70pp

0.59

15

Sao

Color (N.O.): BN/BU (N.O.): BK/WH

Sar

0.59

0

XCSDMP50pp

(N.O.): BK/WH

F F

3 )XQFWLRQGLDJUDPVZLWKPDJQHWSUHVHQWFRQQHFWRURQSLJWDLOYHUVLRQ XCSDMC59pp 0

Pin (N.O.): 1/3 (N.C.): 4/2

0.55

0.20

14

5

XCSDMC79pp

Sao F O

0

0.55

0.20

14

5

Sao F F

Sar

8

0.79 0.55 14

20

8

0.55 14

20

Pin

0

Sar (N.O.): 1/3 (N.C.): 4/2 (N.C.): 6/7

F F O

0.79

0.31 8

Sao

0.55 14

20

Pin

Sar (N.O.): 1/3

4

(N.O.): 4/2 (N.C.): 6/7

XCSDMR79pp;&6'03pp

Pin

0

Sar (N.O.): 1/3 (N.C.): 4/2

F O

F O O

0.79

0.31

Sao

15

XCSDMR59pp;&6'03pp 0.31

0

XCSDMP70pp

0.59

15

Sao

Pin (N.O.): 1/3 (N.O.): 4/2

Sar

0.59

0

XCSDMP50pp

Contact closed Contact open

F F

0.79

0.31 8

Sao

0.55 14

20

5

Pin

Sar (N.O.): 1/3

(N.O.): 4/2

6

6DRVSHFL¿HGRSHUDWLQJGLVWDQFH 6DUVSHFL¿HGWULSSLQJGLVWDQFH Conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-3.

Contact in transition

7

8

9

10 Characteristics: Page 3/55

References: Page 3/56

Accessories: Page 3/58

Dimensions: Page 3/60

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/61

3/59

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Dimensions

Non-contact safety interlock switches Plastic

1RQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHV

1

&RGHGPDJQHWfor XCSDMC

XCSDMC PUHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ

CRQQHFWRURQSLJWDLOFRQQHFWLRQ 0.63

0.28 7

(1)

0.63

0.28

16

0.49

7

(1)

0.63

0.28

16

0.49

7

(1)

12.5 0.31

0.31 8

8

0.63

0.63

16

2.01 51

2xØ1.34

0.31 8

0.63

16

16

2.01

2.01

51

51

2xØ1.34

2xØ1.34

2xØ 3.5

2xØ 3.5

3

16

0.49

12.5

12.5

2

XCSZC1

5.94

2xØ 3.5

(2)

151

Dual Dimensions:

(1) Counterbored: 0.24 x 0.14 in. (Ø 6 x 3.5 mm.)

4

(1) Counterbored: 0.24 x 0.14 in. (Ø 6 x 3.5 mm.) (2) M8 4-pin connector.

INCHES Millimieters

(1) Counterbored: 0.24 x 0.14 in. (Ø 6 x 3.5 mm.)

&RGHGPDJQHWfor XCSDMP

XCSDMP 3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ

&RQQHFWRURQSLJWDLOFRQQHFWLRQ

5

XCSZP1

(1)

5.94 151

2x Ø0.17 2x Ø4.5

6 3.07

3.46

78

88

3.07

3.07

78

78

3.46

3.07

88

78

7 0.31

0.14

0.26

3.5

6.5

8

8

0.26

3.5

0.14 0.31 3.5

6.5

0.51

0.98

8

13

25

0.98 25

8

0.14 0.31

0.26 6.5

0.98 25

(1) 4 or 6-pin M12 connector.

&RGHGPDJQHWfor XCSDMR

XCSDMR 3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ

&RQQHFWRURQSLJWDLOFRQQHFWLRQ

XCSZR1

M30 x 0.06 M30 x 1.5

0.28

9

7

(1)

M30 x 0.06

0.63

M30 x 1.5

1.52 38.5

10

1.52

5.94

38.5

151

0.51 13

(1) M12 4-pin connector.

Characteristics: Page 3/55

3/60

1.18

16

References: Page 3/56

Accessories: Page 3/58

(1)

(1) 0.08 x Ø 0.17 (2 x Ø 4.3), countersunk: Ø 7.5 at 45°.

Dimensions: Page 3/60

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/61

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Dimensions (continued), wiring diagrams, mounting

Non-contact safety interlock switches Plastic

$FFHVVRULHV 0RXQWLQJFODPS

1RQPDJQHWLFVKLPV

XSZ B130

XCSZCC

XCSZCP

1.51

13

Ø1.18

38.3

16

0.49

25

0.47

=

12

12.5

Ø30

0.85

0.47

=

Ø1.18

12

Ø30

21.6

0.63

0.63

1.40 35.5

16

1.2 31

0.73

16

2.01 51

2.56

0.85

3.07

65

4xØ1.34

78

0.31 8

4xØ 3.5

21.7

1.54 (1)

2xØ4.3

88

0.14

2

2xØ0.17

3.46

18.5

3.5

1

XCSZCR 0.98

0.63

0.51

39

3

Ø0.17 Ø4.5

0.16

0.87

0.31

4

22

8

0.45 11.5

(1) 2 elongated holes Ø 4 x 8.

3UHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRUV XZ CP0941Lp

XZ CP1041Lp

0.39 Ø10

XZ CP1141Lp

Ø0.57

27.4

M12x0.04

Ø14.8

19.7

XZ CP29P11Lp

1.08

Ø0.58

0.78 M8x0.04

XZ CP1241Lp

M12x1

M12x1

M8x1

Ø0.58

Ø0.39

Ø14.8

Ø10

1.36

M8x0.04

34.5

M12x0.04

M8x1

1.36

M12x1

1.73

1.65

44

42

L

L

L

Ø0.43

Ø0.30 Ø7.5

Ø7.5

5

L

L

34.6

Ø0.30

4

M12x0.04

Ø14.5

Ø11

Ø0.43 Ø11

Ø0.43 Ø11

:LULQJGLDJUDPV 0SUHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRU

0SUHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRU

XZ CP0941Lp

XZ CP1141Lp, XZ CP1241Lp

BK

4 3

WH

BU

2

6 XZ CP29P11Lp GY 5

BK

3

4

YE

2

1

GN

4

PK

6

1 BN

BU

WH

BN

3

7

7

BU

1

2 BN

WH

8 RD

0RXQWLQJ XCSDMC

XCSDMP

XCSDMR

d

d

b

B

9

XCS DMC DMP

D b F 1.57 (40) 0.51 (13) min. – 3.94 (100) 0.39 (10) min. –

d 3.19 x 2.17 (81 x 55) 4.65 x 2.17 (118 x 55)

e – –

1RQPDJQHWLFVKLPV A XCSZCC B XCSZCP

DMR

1.57 (40)

Ø 1.77 (45) Ø 1.77 (45) – –

0.79 (20) 0.51 (13) 0.79 (20) 0.67 (17)

C

Characteristics: Page 3/55

0.47 (12) min. – 0.47 (12) min. –

> 0.39 (10 ) > 0.39 (10 ) < 0.39 (10) < 0.39 (10)

References: Page 3/56

Accessories: Page 3/58

C

a

A

Ød

a

a

b

B

b

A

8 c e

10

XCSZCR

Dual Dimensions:

Dimensions: Page 3/60

INCHES Millimieters

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/61

3/61

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Wiring diagrams

Non-contact safety interlock switches Plastic, pre-cabled

XCSDMP5pppZLWK;36'0% :LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62 Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (1 N.C. staggered) contact.

1

F1

+ 24 V

To PLC

Guard 1 closed

+ 24 V Start

GY

WH

BN+

BK

BU

2

PK

S1

F

S3 K3

ESC

XCS DM A1

K4

S11

S12

S13

Y1

Y2

13

23

14

24

XPS DMB Supply A1/A2

3

K1

Fault

Fault

K1/K2

Logic

K2

F

BK

BU BN+

4

S23

WH

S21

S2

S22

PK

A2

GY

K1/K2 Y34

Y44

To PLC

XCS DM

K3

+ 24 V

K4

To PLC

0V

Guard 2 closed Channel 1

5

2 solid-state outputs

Channel 2

Safety outputs

ESC: External start conditions. ‡,QSXWV666RU666 ‡8QXVHGLQSXWVPXVWEHMXPSHUHGIURP6BWR6B)RUH[DPSOH6WR6 ‡7KHRUGHULQZKLFKWKHLQSXWVDUHZLUHGRUMXPSHUHGZLOOQRWDIIHFWGHYLFHRSHUDWLRQ

XCSDMC5ppp, XCSDMP5ppp, XCSDMR5pppZLWK;36'0( :LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.O. (N.C. staggered) contact.

6

+ 24 V

F1

S1

S5

S7

XCS DM

BN+

WH

BN+

WH

BN+

BK

BU

BK

BU

S12

S13

S32

S33

S52

S53

S31

S51

Start

ESC

BU

S11

Guard 5 closed

XCS DM

WH A1

S3

XCS DM

BK

7

Guard 3 closed

Guard 1 closed

K3

K4

Y1

Y2

13

23

14

24

XPS DME Supply A1/A2

S13

S33

S53

Fault

S12

S32

S52

S23

S43

S63

S22

S42

S62

0V

Guard 2 closed

S62 S6

BK

XCS DM

S61

WH

S4

S43

Guard 4 closed

K2

S63

Y34

To PLC

K3

Chnl. 1 Chnl. 2 Safety outputs

ESC: External start conditions. ‡,QSXWV6B6B6B ‡8QXVHGLQSXWVPXVWEHMXPSHUHGIURP6BWR6B)RUH[DPSOHLILQSXW666LVQRWXVHGWKHQWHUPLQDOV6DQG6PXVWEHMXPSHUHG ‡7KHRUGHULQZKLFKWKHLQSXWVDUHZLUHGRUMXPSHUHGZLOOQRWDIIHFWGHYLFHRSHUDWLRQ Characteristics: Page 3/55

3/62

References: Page 3/56

Accessories: Page 3/58

K4

Guard 6 closed 2 solid-state outputs

10

Y44

XCS DM

BU

S42

BU

WH

9

XCS DM

S41

BK

BK

S2

S23

BN+

S22

WH

S21

BU

A2

BN+

8

K1/K2

BN+

Logic

K1/K2

K1

Fault

Dimensions: Page 3/60

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/61

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Wiring diagrams (continued)

Non-contact safety interlock switches Plastic, pre-cabled

&RQQHFWLRQRIXSWRQRQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHVZLWKDQ/('RQRQHLQSXWZLWK;36'0p (1) :LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62

Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.O. contact

1

Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. contact

+ 24 V F

XCS DM

BU BN+ BU

BN+

BK WH BK

PK GY

2

S1.2

BN+

XCS DM

BU

3

S1.3

S22

S23

BN+

S21

BU

S13

WH

S12

BK

BN+ BU

S11

4

GY

WH BK

XCS DM

S12

S13

To PLC

XCS DM

PK

WH BK S1.3

PK

GY

BN+

BK

XCS DM

S1.2

WH

S1.1

XCS DM

BU

WH

S1.1

S11 S21

S22

S23

5

(1) Input: S11, S12, S13 or S21, S22, S23.

XCSDMp7ppp ZLWK;36$) :LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.C. contact (not conforming to standard EN 1088/ISO 14119)

6

F1

L ( +)

K3

S2

Start

K4

(1)

ESC

A1

S33

7

(2)

S34

S39

13

23

33

XPS AF K1 T

8

Logic K2

S21

S22

WH

BK

S1

S12

14

24

34

XCS DM

BU

S11

9

BN+

A2

K3

K4

N( )

10

(1) With start button monitoring. (2) Without start button monitoring. ESC: External start conditions. Characteristics: Page 3/55

References: Page 3/56

Accessories: Page 3/58

Dimensions: Page 3/60

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/61

3/63

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Wiring diagrams (continued)

Non-contact safety interlock switches Plastic, connector on pigtail

XCSDMP5ppp ZLWK;36'0% :LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62 Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (1 N.C. staggered) contact.

1

F1

+ 24 V

To PLC

Guard 1 closed

+ 24 V Start

S1

F

6

2

1

4

3

2

7

S3 K3

ESC

XCS DM A1

K4

S11

S12

S13

Y1

Y2

13

23

14

24

XPS DMB Supply A1/A2

3

K1

Fault

Fault

K1/K2

Logic

K2

S22

S23

7

4

3

2

1

A2

6

K1/K2 S21

Y34

Y44

S2

4 F

To PLC

XCS DM

K3

+ 24 V

K4

To PLC

0V

Guard 2 closed Channel 1

5

2 solid-state outputs

Channel 2

Safety outputs

ESC: External start conditions. ‡,QSXWV666RU666 ‡8QXVHGLQSXWVPXVWEHMXPSHUHGIURP6BWR6B)RUH[DPSOH6WR6 ‡7KHRUGHULQZKLFKWKHLQSXWVDUHZLUHGRUMXPSHUHGZLOOQRWDIIHFWGHYLFHRSHUDWLRQ

XCSDMC5ppp, XCSDMP5ppp, XCSDMR5pppZLWK;36'0(

6

:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.O. (N.C. staggered) contact.

+ 24 V

F1 Guard 3 closed

Guard 1 closed

S1

S3

XCS DM

Guard 5 closed

S5

XCS DM

S7

XCS DM

Start

2

1

2

1

2

1

3

4

3

4

3

7

4

ESC K3

K4

A1

S11

S12

S13

S31

S32

S33

S51

S52

S53

Y1

Y2

13

23

14

24

XPS DME

8

Supply A1/A2

S13

S33

S53

Fault

S12

S32

S52

S23

S43

S63

S22

S42

S62

Logic

K1/K2

A2

S21

S22 S2

S42 S4

S43

S62 S6

S63

Y34

Y44

3

4

3

4

3

2

1

2

1

XCS DM

1

XCS DM

S61

K2

4

XCS DM

S41

K1/K2

2

9

S23

K1

Fault

To PLC

K3

0V

Guard 2 closed

Guard 4 closed

Guard 6 closed 2 solid-state outputs

10

K4

Chnl. 1 Chnl. 2 Safety outputs

ESC: External start conditions. ‡,QSXWV6B6B6B ‡8QXVHGLQSXWVPXVWEHMXPSHUHGIURP6BWR6B)RUH[DPSOHLILQSXW666LVQRWXVHGWKHQWHUPLQDOV6DQG6PXVWEHMXPSHUHG ‡7KHRUGHULQZKLFKWKHLQSXWVDUHZLUHGRUMXPSHUHGZLOOQRWDIIHFWGHYLFHRSHUDWLRQ Characteristics: Page 3/55

3/64

References: Page 3/56

Accessories: Page 3/58

Dimensions: Page 3/60

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/61

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Wiring diagrams (continued)

Non-contact safety interlock switches Plastic, connector on pigtail

&RQQHFWLRQRIXSWRQRQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHVZLWKDQ/('RQRQHLQSXWZLWK;36'0p (1) :LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62

Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.O. contact

1

Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. contact

+ 24 V F

XCS DM

S1.1

S1.1

1

2

3

2

6

XCS DM

S1.2

4

4

3

7

1

2

XCS DM

S1.2

6

2

1

7

4

3

3

S1.3

XCS DM

4

S22

S23

S12

S13

To PLC

S21

1

S13

3

S12

2

1 3

S11

4

2 4

XCS DM 6

S1.3

7

4

3

1

2

XCS DM

S11 S21

S22

S23

5

(1) Input: S11, S12, S13 or S21, S22, S23.

XCSDMp7pppZLWK;36$) :LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.C. contact (not conforming to standard EN 1088/ISO 14119)

6

F1

L ( +)

K3

Start

S2 K4

(1)

ESC

A1

S33

7

(2)

S34

S39

13

23

33

XPS AF K1

8

Logic

T

K2

A2

S11

S21

S22

S1

S12

14

24

34

4

3

2

1

XCS DM

9 K3

K4

10

N( )

(1) With start button monitoring. (2) Without start button monitoring. ESC: External start conditions. Characteristics: Page 55

References: Page 56

Accessories: Page 58

Dimensions: Page 60

Wiring Diagrams: Page 61

3/65

Presentation

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Non-Contact safety interlock switches

1

1RQ&RQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHV 3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ

6,/DQG&DWHJRULHVDQG XCSDM3791pp ;&6'0pp

2

3 page 6

4

1RQ&RQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHV 0FRQQHFWRUFRQQHFWLRQ

6,/DQG&DWHJRULHVDQG ;&6'00;&6'00

5

6 page 18

7

8

9

10

3/66

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Characteristics

Non-Contact safety interlock switches

1RQ&RQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNW\SH

6,/&DWHJRU\ XCSDM3

6,/&DWHJRU\ XCSDM4

1

(QYLURQPHQW &RQIRUPLW\WRVWDQGDUGV

IEC 61508, EN/IEC 62061( SIL2 and SIL3), EN 13849-1 (Category 3 and Category 4), EN 1088/ISO 14119, EN/IEC 60947-5-1; EN/IEC 60947-5-2 ; EN/IEC 60947-5-3 e, UL, CSA, TÜV

3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV $PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH

For operation

ƒ)ƒ&

-13...+158 (-25...+70)

For storage

ƒ)ƒ&

+ 40 ...+ 185 (-40...+85)

9LEUDWLRQUHVLVWDQFH

Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6

10 gn (10…500 Hz)

6KRFNUHVLVWDQFH

Conforming to IEC 60068-2-7

30 gn, 11 ms

6HQVLWLYLW\WRPDJQHWLF¿HOGV

mT

y 0,5

(OHFWULFVKRFNSURWHFWLRQ

Conforming to IEC 61140

Class III

'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ

Conforming to IEC 60529

Pre-cabled version: IP 66, IP 67 Connector version: IP 67

Conforming to DIN 40050

Pre-cabled version: IP 69K

0DWHULDOV

2

3

Thermoplastic case (PBT); PVC cable

&KDUDFWHULVWLFV 5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV

Ub : c 24 V + 10% - 20%

5DWHGLQVXODWLRQYROWDJH(Ui)

Ui : c 36V

5DWHGLPSXOVHZLWKVWDQGYROWDJH (U imp)

Conforming to EN 60947-5-1

kV

,QWHJUDWHGRXWSXWSURWHFWLRQ

4

2,5 Overload and short-circuit protection

&RQQHFWLRQ

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-2-A3 and IEC 61076

Pre-cabled, 6 x 22 AWG (0.25 mm²), length: 6.6, 16.4 or 32.8 ft. (2, 5, or 10 m) depending on model or M12 connector (A coding)

&DEOHGLDPHWHU

LQ PP

0.24 (6.1 +/- 0.3)

&DEOHUHVLVWDQFH

m1P

90

Pre-cabled, 8 x 22 AWG (0.25 mm²), length: 6.6, 16.4 or 32.8 ft. (2, 5, or 10 m) depending on model or M12 connector (A coding)

6DIHW\RXWSXWV266'  2XWSXW6LJQDO6ZLWFKLQJ'HYLFHV

2 PNP type (NO) solid-state outputs, 1.5 A (2 A up to 140 °F (60°C)), c 24 V (short-circuit protected)

$ODUPRXWSXW

–

6LJQDOOLQJ

LED (green/red/orange)

0D[LPXPVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQF\

+]

3

$FWLYDWLRQGHOD\

PV

100

'LVFRUGDQFHWLPH

V

2

+)7+DUGZDUH)DXOW7ROHUDQFH

1 solid-state output, 0.5 A, c 24 V, PNP

OEIW 1P

0D[LPXPVHULHVPRXQWLQJ

6

1

7

Test interval: 12 months 7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH

5

1.327 (1.8) maximum 32 maximum with 6.6 ft. (2 m) long cable

–

- LED status signalling

- Auto/Manual start via “Start”input - Monitoring of external switching devices (EDM: External Devices Monitoring) - Display of operating modes (LED) - Monitoring of the function (open or closed) as well as the response time of the power components.

)XQFWLRQV )XQFWLRQV

8

9

10 Characteristics: Page 3/67

References: Page 3/68

Accessories: Page 3/70

Dimensions: Page 3/71

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/73

3/67

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

References, characteristics

Non-contact safety interlock switches Plastic, solid-state PNP type output

1RQ&RQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHVZLWKGHGLFDWHGWUDQVPLWWHU 3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ

Type

1

2

3 5HIHUHQFHV 'HVFULSWLRQ

4

0DJQHWLFV\VWHPZLWKGHGLFDWHG WUDQVPLWWHU(1)

7\SHRIFRQQHFWLRQ

6,/&DWHJRU\

6,/&DWHJRU\

:HLJKW R]NJ

Pre-cabled, L = 6.6 ft (2 m)

XCSDM379102

XCSDM480102

11.288 (0.320)

Pre-cabled, L = 16.4 ft. (5 m)

XCSDM379105

XCSDM480105

16.932 (0.480)

Pre-cabled, L = 32.8 ft. (10 m)

XCSDM379110

XCSDM480110

26.279 (0,745)

(1) Self-contained system not requiring use of safety module or non-magnetic shim.

5

6

'HWHFWLRQFKDUDFWHULVWLFV $VVXUHGRSHUDWLQJGLVWDQFH

Sao : 0.39 in. (10 mm)

$VVXUHGWULSSLQJGLVWDQFH

Sar : 0.79 in. (20 mm)

$SSURDFKGLUHFWLRQV

9

$SSURDFKVSHHG

0.03 ft./s (0.01 m/s) mini

2XWSXWVWDWXVSUHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ Output states shown are with the dedicated transmitter positioned in front of the receiver. XCSDM3791pp

XCSDM4801pp 0.55

0.55 14

7

0

0.39 Sao

10

14

0.79

0

20

Sao

10

0.79 20

I1/O1 - GY/BK (NO) I2/O2 - PK/WH (NO)

I1/O1 - GY/BK (NO) I2/O2 - PK/WH (NO)

Sar

Sar

8

0.39

Er - VT(NC)

ON

OFF

“OFF” = Error

6DR6SHFL¿HGRSHUDWLQJGLVWDQFH 6DU6SHFL¿HGWULSSLQJGLVWDQFH Conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-3

Output closed Output open Transitional state

$SSURDFKGLUHFWLRQV

9

10 Characteristics: Page 3/67

3/68

References: Page 3/68

Accessories: Page 3/70

Dimensions: Page 3/71

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/73

References, characteristics (continued)

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Non-contact safety interlock switches Plastic, solid-state PNP type output

1RQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNZLWKGHGLFDWHGWUDQVPLWWHU 0FRQQHFWRUFRQQHFWLRQ

Type

1

2

3 5HIHUHQFHV 'HVFULSWLRQ

7\SHRI FRQQHFWLRQ

1RQ&RQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHVZLWK M12 connector GHGLFDWHGWUDQVPLWWHU(1)

6,/&DWHJRU\

6,/&DWHJRU\

XCSDM3791M12

XCSDM4801M12

:HLJKW R]NJ 7.584 (0.215)

4

1) Self-contained system not requiring use of safety module or non-magnetic shim.

'HWHFWLRQFKDUDFWHULVWLFV

5

$VVXUHGRSHUDWLQJGLVWDQFH

Sao : 0.39 in. (10 mm)

$VVXUHGWULSSLQJGLVWDQFH

Sar : 0.79 in. (20 mm)

$SSURDFKGLUHFWLRQV

9

$SSURDFKVSHHG

0.03 ft./s (0.01 m/s) mini

2XWSXWVWDWXVSUHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ Output states shown are with the dedicated transmitter positioned in front of the receiver. XCSDM3791M12

0.55

0.55 14

0

0.39 Sao

10

6

XCSDM4801M12 14

0.79

0

20

0.39 Sao

10

0.79 20

I1/O1 - 5/4 (NO) I2/O2 - 6/4 (NO)

I1/O1 - 7/4 (NO) I2/O2 - 6/2 (NO)

Sar

Sar

Er- 7(NC)

ON

“OFF” = Error

7

OFF

6DR6SHFL¿HGRSHUDWLQJGLVWDQFH 6DU6SHFL¿HGWULSSLQJGLVWDQFH Conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-3

Output closed Output open Transitional state

8

9

10 Characteristics: Page 3/67

References: Page 3/68

Accessories: Page 3/70

Dimensions: Page 3/71

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/73

3/69

References, characteristics (continued)

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Non-contact safety interlock switches Accessories

$FFHVVRULHV 'HVFULSWLRQ

1

2

)RUXVHZLWK

5HIHUHQFH

:HLJKW R]NJ

5HSODFHPHQWGHGLFDWHG WUDQVPLWWHU

XCSDM3/4ppp02/05/10 XCSDM3/4pppM12

XCSDMT

3.527 (0.100)

$UFVXSSUHVVRU(pair)

XCSDM3/4ppp02/05/10 XCSDM3/4pppM12

XUSLZ500

0.705 (0.020)

3UHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRUVIRUFRQQHFWRUYHUVLRQ1RQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHV 3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUFKDUDFWHULVWLFV 3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUW\SH

3

XZ CP29P12Lp

7\SHRIFRQQHFWLRQ

Screw threaded (metal clamping ring)

1XPEHURIFRQWDFWV

8

'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ $PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH &DEOLQJ

IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened) Operation

ƒ)ƒ&

- 13 ...+ 158 (- 25 ...+ 70)

Storage

ƒ)ƒ&

- 40 ...+ 185 (- 40…+ 85)

Conforming to IEC 60947-5-2

Ø 6.1 mm PUR cable, wire c.s.a.: 8 x 22 AWG (0.25 mm2)

/('VLJQDOOLQJ

4

–

1RPLQDOFXUUHQW

A

2

,QVXODWLRQUHVLVWDQFH

1

> 109

&RQWDFWUHVLVWDQFH

m1

y5

5HIHUHQFHVRISUHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUV

5

DF536653

7\SHRI FRQQHFWRU

1RRI )RUXVHZLWK FRQWDFWV

)HPDOH0 8 &RGLQJ$

Type

&DEOH OHQJWK IWP

XCSDM3/4ppp02 Straight 6.6 (2) XCSDM3/4ppp05 XCSDM3/4ppp10 16.4 (5) 32.8 (10)

XZ CP29P12Lp

5HIHUHQFH

XZCP29P12L2

3.527 (0.100)

XZCP29P12L5

10.229 (0.290)

XZCP29P12L10

16.579 (0.470)

6

7

8

9

10 Characteristics: Page 3/67

3/70

References: Page 3/68

Accessories: Page 3/70

Dimensions: Page 3/71

:HLJKW R]NJ

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/73

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Dimensions

Non-contact safety interlock switches Plastic

1RQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFN VZLWFKHV 3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ ;&6'0ppp

$FFHVVRU\ 0FRQQHFWRU&RGLQJ$ FRQQHFWLRQ ;&6'0pppM12

1.26

5HSODFHPHQWGHGLFDWHGWUDQVPLWWHU XCSDMT

1.26

32

0.31 0.47 12

34

32

0.31

1.34

8

1.34

8

0.20

0.47 12

5

34

0.20

0.20

5

5

3.23

8

3

0.24 6

4

4.6

3.23

3.23

82

27

0.18

4.6

4.6

0.31

1.06

0.18

0.18

2

1.26

32

1

82

82

3.94

3.94

3.94

100

100

5

100

0.35 9

6 Ø 0.16

Ø 0.16

Ø4

Ø4

Ø 0.16 Ø4

Dual Dimensions:

INCHES

3UHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRUV

8

XZ CP29P12Lp Ø0.57 Ø14.5

7

Millimieters

M12x0.04 M12x1

9

1.65

L

42

10

Ø0.43 Ø11

Characteristics: Page 3/67

References: Page 3/68

Accessories: Page 3/70

Dimensions: Page 3/71

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/73

3/71

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Wiring diagrams, mounting

Non-contact safety interlock switches

:LULQJGLDJUDP

1

0SUHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRU XZ CP29P12Lp GY BK

2

PK

5 4

6

3

BU

7 2 8

WH

VT

1 BN

OG

0RXQWLQJ

3

;&6'0'0 u 0.79

u 0.79

u 20

u 0.79 u 20

u 20

u 0.79 u 20

4

u 20

u 0.79 u 0.79

u 0.79

u 20

u 20

u 0.79 u 20

u 0.79 u 20

5 Dual Dimensions:

6

7

8

9

10 Characteristics: Page 3/67

3/72

References: Page 3/68

Accessories: Page 3/70

Dimensions: Page 3/71

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/73

INCHES Millimieters

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Wiring diagrams

Non-contact safety interlock switches

:LULQJGLDJUDPV &DWHJRU\(this Category 3 wiring can attain SIL2) 3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ

0FRQQHFWRU$FRGLQJ FRQQHFWLRQ

XCSDM3791pp

XCSDM3791M12 N

F1

L

BN +

1

F1 2A

I1 GY

I1 7

1

+

2A +

NO

NO GND

L

2

O1 4

I2 PK

I2 6

+

O2 2

K2

Supply ABL8 pppp

O2 WH

NO

N

O1 BK

K2

NO

K1 GND

BU

0V

K1

6

4

1

2

7

24V 3

(1)

(1)

–

3

3

–

6,/&DWHJRU\ 3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ

0FRQQHFWRU$FRGLQJ FRQQHFWLRQ

XCSDM4801pp

XCSDM4801M12 F1 N F1 2A

BN + +

Diag

L

Er VT I1 GY

To + PLC

O1 BK I2 PK

+

GND

1 +

Diag

N

K2

Supply ABL8pppp

K1

GND

0V

Start

+

(1)

O2 2

5

6

K2

K1

3

(1)

4

7

3 1

Start input

8

–

8

5

2

– +

K2

+ K2

4

24V

BU

OG input

+

O1 4 I2 6

L

NO NO

Er 7 I1 5 NO

NO

O2 WH

2A + To PLC

K1

K1

6HULHVPRXQWLQJQRQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHV(2)

6

:LULQJWR6,/&DWHJRU\ZLWKVDIHW\UHOD\PRGXOH

XCSDM3791pp

([DPSOH;&6'0ppppp + XPSAFL5130 F1

F1

+

2A I1

NO

2A

+

NO O1 I2

NO

7

O1

+

I2

O2

N

– +

L

NO

O2

F2 (3) I1

NO

A1 GND

O1

N

L

13

23

14

24

8

XPS Apppp

Supply ABL8pppp

I2 NO

I1

K1

Logic

T

O2

K2 –

GND

+ NO

0V

24V A2

I1 O1

S33

9

K1

K1

I2

S3

K1 NO

S34

K2

O2

K2

10

K2 –

(1) Mechanically linked contacts (2) Maximum series mounting: 32 maximum with 6.6 ft. (2 m) long cable. (3) 2A maximum

3/73

Presentation

2

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV Safety limit switches Miniature design, metal, type XCS M

XCS M

520576

1

:LWKKHDGIRUOLQHDUPRYHPHQWSOXQJHU 0RXQWLQJE\WKHERG\

SUHFDEOHG

2 page 3/76

520577

:LWKKHDGIRUURWDU\PRYHPHQWOHYHU 0RXQWLQJE\WKHERG\

3

4 page 3/76

5

6

7

8

9

10

3/74

Characteristics

2

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV Safety limit switches Miniature design, metal, type XCS M

(QYLURQPHQW &RQIRUPLQJWRVWDQGDUGV

Products Machine assemblies

3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV 3URWHFWLYHWUHDWPHQW $PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH 9LEUDWLRQUHVLVWDQFH 6KRFNUHVLVWDQFH (OHFWULFVKRFNSURWHFWLRQ 'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ 0DWHULDOV 5HSHDWDFFXUDF\

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14 IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088 UL, CSA Standard version: “TC” Operation: - 13…+ 158 °F(- 25...+ 70 °C). Storage: - 40…+ 158 °F (- 40…+ 70 °C) XCS M snap action: 5 gn. XCS M slow break: 25 gn (10…500 Hz) conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 25 gn, (18 ms) conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 Class I, conforming to IEC 6140 and NF C 20-030 ,3,3DQG,3(1)FRQIRUPLQJWR,(&,.FRQIRUPLQJWR(1 Body: zamak. Head: zamak. Protective cover: steel. 0.002 in. (0.05 mm) on the tripping points with 1 million operating cycles for head with end plunger

1

2

&RQWDFWEORFNFKDUDFWHULVWLFV

5DWHGLQVXODWLRQYROWDJH 5DWHGLPSXOVHZLWKVWDQGYROWDJH 3RVLWLYHRSHUDWLRQ(depending on model) 5HVLVWDQFHDFURVVWHUPLQDOV 6KRUWFLUFXLWSURWHFWLRQ 0LQLPXPDFWXDWLRQVSHHG (OHFWULFDOOLIH

Millions of operating cycles

a.c. supply a 50/60 Hz o inductive circuit

a$&%8H 9,H $ c'&58H 9,H $ FRQIRUPLQJWR,(&$SSHQGL[$ EN 60947-5-1 Ui = 400 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC 60947-5-1 Ui = 300 V conforming to UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14 U imp = 4 kV conforming to IEC 60947-1, IEC 60664 N.C. contacts with positive opening operation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix K )25 m1 conforming to IEC 60255-7 category 3 6 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl) Snap action contact: 0.01 m/minute Break before make, slow break: 6 m/minute b Conforming to 60947-5-1 Appendix C b Utilisation category AC-15 and DC-13 b Maximum frequency: 3600 operating cycles/hour b Load factor: 0.5 ;&60VQDSDFWLRQ ;&60VORZEUHDN (N.C.+ N.C. + N.O., N.C.+ N.C. + N.O. + N.O. 1&1&12FRQWDFW FRQWDFWV 5 4 3 2 1

Millions of operating cycles

5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV

Ithe 48 V 110 V

0,5

5 4 3

3

4

5

Ithe 12/24/48 V

2

230 V

1

110 V

6

0,5

12/24 V

230 V

0,1

0,1 0,5

d.c. supply c

0,5

1

2

3

Power broken in W for 5 million operating cycles Voltage V 24 o W 3 (OHFWULFDO/LIH

1

2

4 56 10 Current in A

48 2

120 1

3

4 56

10

Current in A

Power broken in W for 5 million operating cycles Voltage V 24 o W 4

7 48 3

120 3

The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the limited warranty offered on this product please refer to the Square D ® terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D ® Digest.

8

9

10 Characteristics: Page 3/75

References: Page 3/76

Accessories: Page 3/76

Dimensions: Page 3/77

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/77

3/75

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

References, characteristics

2

Safety limit switches Miniature design, metal, type XCS M Pre-cabled

7\SHRIKHDG

3OXQJHUPRXQWLQJE\WKHERG\

5RWDU\PRXQWLQJE\WKHERG\

Metal end plunger

Thermoplastic roller lever

1

2

7\SHRIRSHUDWRU

Roller plunger

Steel roller lever

3-pole N.C.+N.C.+N.O. VQDSDFWLRQFRQWDFW

BU

BK

RD

5HIHUHQFHVZLWKIWP FDEOH XCS M3910L2

BN

RD-WH

3

BK-WH

GN-YE

XCS M3902L2

1,8 4,2(P)

BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BN-BU RD-RD-WH BK-BK-WH BN-BU

5 mm

0

BU

BK

RD

0,8

3-pole N.C.+N.C.+N.O. EUHDNEHIRUHPDNH VORZEUHDNFRQWDFW

VT

BU

BK

RD

4-pole N.C.+N.C.+N.O.+N.O. VQDSDFWLRQFRQWDFW

BN

VT-WH

RD-WH

BK-WH

2,6

5 mm

XCS M4110L2

BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BN-BU VT-VT-WH RD-RD-WH BK-BK-WH BN-BU VT-VT-WH

1,8

0,8

5.820 (0.165) closed open

XCS M3916L2

25˚ 70˚(P)

BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BN-BU RD-RD-WH BK-BK-WH BN-BU

0

90˚

12˚ XCS M3715L2

3,1(A) 5,6(P)

25˚

4,6 mm

0

4,2(P) BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BN-BU VT-VT-WH BK-BK RD-RD-WH BN-BU VT-VT-WH

45˚(P)

0

36˚ 90˚

XCS M4115L2

mm 1,4

5.997 (0.170)

BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BN-BU VT-VT-WH RD-RD-WH BK-BK-WH BN-BU RD-RD-WH

0

90˚

25˚

45˚(P)

BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BN-BU

0

3,1(A) 7(P)

25˚ 70˚(P)

BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BN-BU RD-RD-WH BK-BK-WH BN-BU

12˚ XCS M3716L2

BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BN-BU

XCS M4102L2

5 mm

0

:HLJKWR]NJ &RQWDFWRSHUDWLRQ

mm

BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BN-BU

GN-YE

6

0

1,8 3,1(P) BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BN-BU

0

5

3,1(A) 7(P)

BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BN-BU BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BN-BU

1,4 XCS M3702L2

XCS M3710L2

BN

RD-WH

4

BK-WH

GN-YE

XCS M3915L2

90˚ 12˚

36˚ 90˚

XCS M4116L2

25˚ 70˚(P)

0

0

BK-BK-WH RD-RD-WH BN-BU VT-VT-WH RD-RD-WH BK-BK-WH BN-BU RD-RD-WH

25˚ 70˚(P)

0

90˚ 12˚

7.231 (0.205) 7.408 (0.210) (A) = cam displacement (P) = positive opening point N.C. contact with opening positive operation

&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHUJHQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJH 6ZLWFKDFWXDWLRQ 7\SHRIDFWXDWLRQ

On end

By 30° cam

7 0D[LPXPDFWXDWLRQVSHHG 0LQLPXPIRUFHRUWRUTXH

8

&DEOLQJ

Tripping Positive opening 3-pole contacts 4-pole contacts

1.64 ft/s (0.5 m/s) 1.64 ft/s (0.5 m/s) 4.9 ft/s (1.5 m/s) 1.9 lb (8.5 N) 1.6 lb (7 N) OELQ1‡P 9.6 lb (42.4 N) 7.9 lb (35 N) OELQ1‡P PVR pre-cabled, 7 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) PVR pre-cabled, 9 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2), (1) Devices shown have a 6.6 ft (2 m) cable, and are available with other lengths of cable: For a 3.3 ft (1 m) long cable, replace L2 with L1. For a 16.4 ft (5 m) long cable, replace L2 with L5.

9

10 Characteristics: Page 3/75

3/76

References: Page 3/76

Accessories: Page 3/76

Dimensions: Page 3/77

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/77

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Dimensions, Wiring diagrams

2

Safety limit switches Miniature design, metal, type XCS M Pre-cabled

'LPHQVLRQV XCSM pp10L1

XCSM pp02L1 .14 Ø.28 Ø7

1

Ø.46 Ø11.6

3.5

.79 20

Ø.16 Ø4

Ø.16 Ø4

1.20

(1)

1.57

30.4

2.77 70.4

2.36 60

(1)

1.97

1.97

1.57 40

50

20

.63

20

1.18

16

1.18

16

2

.79

.79 .63

40

50

30

30

(1) Protective cover mounted with 5-lobe torque safety screws.

XCSM pp15L1

XCSM pp16L1

1.22

1.22

31

31

.94

3

.94

24

24 Ø.63 Ø16

.22 5.5

Ø.63 Ø16

.22 5.5

1.35

1.35

34.4

2.13

(1)

1.57

54

3.70

Ø.16 Ø4

2.13

(1)

1.57

54

3.70

94

94

40

40

.79

.79

20

.63 1.28

4

34.4

Ø.16 Ø4

30

1.18

16

1.28

32.4

5

20

.63

1.18

16

30

32.4 Dual Dimensions:

INCHES Millimieters

(1) Protective cover mounted with 5-lobe torque safety screws.

:LULQJGLDJUDPV :LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1 ,(& Example with 3-pole N.C.+N.C.+N.O. contact and protective fuse to prevent jumpering of the N.C. contacts, either by cable damage or by tampering.

BU

BK

RD

O

BU

BK

RD

Example with 3-pole N.C.+N.C.+N.O. contact with mixed redundancy of the contacts and the associated control relyas. Opening and closing of the guard necessary to activate K1.

F1

(1)

F1

K2

BN

BK-WH

RD-WH

KM1 K2

O

7

K1

K1 GN-YE

BN

BK-WH

GN-YE

RD-WH

6

:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,(&

I

KM2

KM1 KM2

I

K

K1 M

K

M K2

(1) Signalling contact

8

K2

H1

K1

H1: “guard closed” indicator light

([DPSOHRIJXDUGPRQLWRULQJXVLQJVZLWFKHVDQGVDIHW\UHOD\PRGXOHFDWHJRU\ 2SHUDWLRQLQSRVLWLYHDQGQHJDWLYHFRPELQHG PRGH

9

10 XPS

Characteristics: Page 3/75

References: Page 3/76

Accessories: Page 3/76

Dimensions: Page 3/77

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/77

3/77

Presentation

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

2

Safety limit switches Compact design, metal, type XCSD Compact design, plastic, type XCS P

b XCSD, XCS P

5629

5629

5629 562943

1

:LWKKHDGIRUOLQHDUPRYHPHQWSOXQJHU XCSD XCS P

ZLWKFRQGXLWHQWU\ FRQIRUPLQJWR(1

2

XCS P 5

5

:LWKKHDGIRUURWDU\PRYHPHQWOHYHU XCSD 5

Pages 3/82 and 3/83

5

3

Pages 3/80 and 3/81

4

5

Pages 3/80 and 3/81

6

7

8

9

10

3/78

Pages 3/82 and 3/83

Characteristics

2

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV Safety limit switches Compact design, metal, type XCSD Compact design, plastic, type XCS P

(QYLURQPHQWDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV &RQIRUPLW\WRVWDQGDUGV 3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV 3URWHFWLYHWUHDWPHQW $PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH 9LEUDWLRQUHVLVWDQFH 6KRFNUHVLVWDQFH (OHFWULFVKRFNSURWHFWLRQ 'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ

Products Machine assemblies Standard version For operation For storage Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27

Conforming to IEC 60529 Conforming to EN 50102

5HSHDWDFFXUDF\ &DEOHHQWU\ 0DWHULDOV

Depending on model

IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088/ISO 14119 UL, CSA “TC” - 13…+ 158 °F (- 25…+ 70 °C) - 40…+ 158 °F (- 40…+ 70 °C) 25 gn (10…500 Hz) 50 gn (11 ms) Class I conforming to IEC 61140 and NF C 20-030 for XCSD Class II conforming to IEC 61140 and NF C 20-030 for XCS P ,3DQG,3 ,.IRU;&6' ,.IRU;&63 0.004 in (0.1 mm) on the tripping points, with 1 million operating cycles for head with end plunger Tapped entry for 13.5 cable gland, tapped ISO M20 x 1.5 or tapped 1/2” NPT XCSD zamak bodies and heads, XCS P plastic bodies, zamak heads Plastic protective cover, secured by 5-lobe socket head safety screw

1

2

3

&RQWDFWEORFNFKDUDFWHULVWLFV a AC-15; B300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 1.5 A); Ithe = 6 A c DC-13; R300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.1 A), conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix A Ui = 400 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-1 Ui = 300 V conforming to UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14 U imp = 4 kV conforming to EN/IEC 60947-1, IEC 60664

5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDO FKDUDFWHULVWLFV 5DWHGLQVXODWLRQYROWDJH

Snap action Slow break

N.C. contacts with positive opening operation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix K y 25 m1 conforming to IEC 60255-7 category 3 6 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl) Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2), max: 1 x 18 AWG (1 mm2) or 2 x 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) 0.39 in/ (0.01 m) per minute 19.7 ft/ (6 m) per minute

a.c. supply a 50/60 Hz o inductive circuit

Ithe

5

1 0,5

110 V 230/400 V

24 V

Millions of operating cycles

b Conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix C b Utilisation categories AC-15 and DC-13 b Maximum operating rate: 3600 operating cycles/hour b Load factor: 0.5 6QDSDFWLRQFRQWDFWV 6ORZEUHDNFRQWDFWV

(OHFWULFDOOLIH

Millions of operating cycles

5DWHGLPSXOVHZLWKVWDQG YROWDJH 3RVLWLYHRSHUDWLRQ 5HVLVWDQFHDFURVVWHUPLQDOV 6KRUWFLUFXLWSURWHFWLRQ &RQQHFWLRQ (screw clamp terminals) 0LQLPXPDFWXDWLRQVSHHG (for head with end plunger)

4

5

6 Ithe

5 4 3 2

230 V 1

12/24/48 V 110 V

7

0,5

0,2

48 V 0,1 0,5

d.c. supply c

1

2

3 4 5 10 Current in A

Power broken in W for 5 million operating cycles. Voltage V 24 48 120 o W 3 2 1

0,1 0,5

1

2

3 4 5 10 Current in A

8

Power broken in W for 5 million operating cycles. Voltage V 24 48 120 o W 4 3 2

(OHFWULFDO/LIH The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the limited warranty offered on this product please refer to the Square D ® terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D ® Digest.

9

10 Characteristics: Page 3/79

References: Page 3/80

Accessories: Page 3/80

Dimensions: Page 3/80

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/80

3/79

References, characteristics, dimensions

7\SHRIKHDG

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV Safety limit switches Compact design, metal, type XCSD 2

3OXQJHU

5RWDU\

1

2

7\SHRIRSHUDWRU

Metal end plunger

Steel roller plunger

Thermoplastic roller lever

Steel roller lever

5HIHUHQFHVRIFRPSOHWHVZLWFKHVZLWKSROH1&1&12VQDSDFWLRQFRQWDFW :LWK´137FDEOHHQWU\

3

XCSD3910N12

XCSD3902N12

XCSD3918N12

XCSD3919N12

XCSD3910P20

XCSD3902P20

XCSD3918P20

XCSD3919P20

;&6'*

;&6'*

;&6'*

;&6'*

7.585 (0.215)

7.760 (0.220)

8.995 (0.255)

8.995 (0.255)

:LWK,620[FDEOHHQWU\

:LWK3JFDEOHHQWU\

:HLJKWR]NJ

31

21

13

22

14

&RQWDFWIXQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPV

32

4

3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. VQDSDFWLRQFRQWDFW

1,8 4,5(P) 21-22 31-32 13-14 21-22 31-32 13-14

0

5

3,1(A) 7,8(P)

21-22 31-32 13-14 21-22 31-32 13-14

0

5mm 0,9

&RQWDFWRSHUDWLRQ

25˚ 70˚(P)

25˚ 70˚(P)

21-22 31-32 13-14 21-22 31-32 13-14

21-22 31-32 13-14 21-22 31-32 13-14

0

mm 1,5

0

90˚ 12˚

90˚ 12˚

contact closed (A) = cam displacement (P) = positive opening point contact open N.C. contact with positive opening operation

&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHUJHQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJH 6ZLWFKDFWXDWLRQ 7\SHRIDFWXDWLRQ

On end

By 30° cam

6 0D[LPXPDFWXDWLRQVSHHG 0LQLPXPIRUFHRUWRUTXH

For tripping For positive opening

&RQGXLWHQWU\

7

1.64 ft/s (0.5 m/s) 4.9 ft/s (1.5 m/s) 3.72 lb (15 N) 2.70 lb (12 N) OELQ1‡P 10.12 lb (45 N) 8.09 lb (36 N) OELQ1‡P 1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm 1 entry tapped Pg 13.5 for cable gland, clamping capacity 9 to 12 mm 1 entry tapped for 1/2” NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit

'LPHQVLRQV XCSD3p10ppp

XCSD3p02ppp .49 12.5

.14

.49

8

12.5

.08

Ø.46 Ø11.6

3.5

Ø.28 Ø7

.08 2

2

1.20

.79

30.5

20

2.01

2.56

51

65

9

2.01

2.56

51

65

19

(2)

.75 19

(3)

(3)

.55 1.18 30

10

(2)

.75

(1) Tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5 cable gland or 1/2” NPT conduit. (2) 2 elongated holes Ø.17 x .25 in. (Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm) on .87 in. (22 mm) centers or 2 holes Ø.17 in. ( Ø 4.3 mm) on .79 in. (20 mm) centers. (3) .08 x Ø.12 in. (2 x Ø 3 mm) holes for studs, depth . 16 in. (4 mm).

1.36 34.5

14

(1)

=

.79/.87 20/22

.55

=

1.18 30

1.36

1.34

14

=

(1)

20/22

34

15° 15° .49 12.5 Dual Dimensions:

Characteristics: Page 3/79

3/80

References: Page 3/80

=

1.34

34.5

34

.79/.87

Accessories: Page 3/80

Dimensions: Page 3/80

INCHES Millimieters

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/80

References, characteristics, dimensions (continued)

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV Safety limit switches Compact design, metal, type XCSD 2

7\SHRIKHDG

3OXQJHU

5RWDU\

1

7\SHRIRSHUDWRU

Metal end plunger

Steel roller plunger

Thermoplastic roller lever

2

Steel roller lever

5HIHUHQFHVRIFRPSOHWHVZLWFKHVZLWKSROH1&1&12EUHDNEHIRUHPDNHVORZEUHDNFRQWDFW :LWK´137FDEOHHQWU\ XCSD3710N12

XCSD3702N12

XCSD3718N12

XCSD3719N12

XCSD3710P20

XCSD3702P20

XCSD3718P20

XCSD3719P20

;&6'*

;&6'*

;&6'*

;&6'*

7.585 (0.215)

7.760 (0.220)

8.995 (0.255)

8.995 (0.255)

:LWK,620[FDEOHHQWU\

3

:LWK3JFDEOHHQWU\

:HLJKWR]NJ

4

13 14

21 22

32

31

&RQWDFWIXQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPV 3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. EUHDNEHIRUHPDNH VORZEUHDNFRQWDFW

&RQWDFWRSHUDWLRQ

1,8 3,2(P)

3,1(A) 5,6(P)

21-22 31-32 13-14

21-22 31-32 13-14

0

3

21-22 31-32 13-14

21-22 31-32 13-14

0

5mm

25˚ 70˚(P)

25˚ 70˚(P)

5,2 mm

0

42˚

90˚

0

42˚

90˚

contact closed (A) = cam displacement (P) = positive opening point contact open N.C. contact with positive opening operation

5

&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHUJHQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJH 6ZLWFKDFWXDWLRQ 7\SHRIDFWXDWLRQ

On end

0D[LPXPDFWXDWLRQVSHHG 0LQLPXPIRUFHRUWRUTXH

1.64 ft/s (0.5 m/s) 4.9 ft/s (1.5 m/s) 3.72 lb (15 N) 2.70 lb (12 N) OELQ1‡P 10.12 lb (45 N) 8.09 lb (36 N) OELQ1‡P 1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm 1 entry tapped Pg 13.5 for cable gland, clamping capacity 9 to 12 mm 1 entry tapped for 1/2” NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit

For tripping For positive opening

&RQGXLWHQWU\

By 30° cam

6

7

'LPHQVLRQV XCSD3p18ppp, XCSD3p19ppp 1.57 40

.22 5.5

.94

.75

24

Ø19

8

.49 1.30

12.5

33

.08

2.07

2

2.56 65

52.5

2.01 51

(2)

.75 19

9

(3)

.55 1.18 30

(1) Tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5 cable gland or 1/2” NPT conduit. (2) 2 elongated holes Ø.17 x .25 in. (Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm) on .87 in. (22 mm) centers or 2 holes Ø.17 in. ( Ø 4.3 mm) on .79 in. (20 mm) centers. (3) .08 x Ø.12 in. (2 x Ø 3 mm) holes for studs, depth . 16 in. (4 mm). Characteristics: Page 3/79

References: Page 3/80

1.36

14

=

(1)

.79/.87 20/22

=

1.34 34

34.5

15° 15°

10

.49 12.5 Dual Dimensions:

Accessories: Page 3/80

Dimensions: Page 3/80

INCHES Millimieters

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/80

3/81

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

References, characteristics, dimensions (continued)

Safety limit switches Compact design, plastic, type XCS P 2

7\SHRIKHDG

3OXQJHU

5RWDU\

1

2

7\SHRIRSHUDWRU

Metal end plunger

Steel roller plunger

Thermoplastic roller lever

Steel roller lever

5HIHUHQFHVRIFRPSOHWHVZLWFKHVZLWKSROH1&1&12VQDSDFWLRQFRQWDFW :LWK´137FDEOHHQWU\

3

XCS P3910N12

XCS P3902N12

XCS P3918N12

XCS P3919N12

XCS P3910P20

XCS P3902P20

XCS P3918P20

XCS P3919P20

;&63*

;&63*

;&63*

;&63*

7.585 (0.215)

7.760 (0.220)

8.995 (0.255)

8.995 (0.255)

:LWK,620[FDEOHHQWU\

:LWK3JFDEOHHQWU\

:HLJKWR]NJ

13

21

3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. VQDSDFWLRQFRQWDFW

14

32

31

&RQWDFWIXQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPV 22

4

21-22 31-32 13-14 21-22 31-32 13-14

0

5

3,1(A) 7,8(P)

1,8 4,5(P) 21-22 31-32 13-14 21-22 31-32 13-14

0

5mm

25˚ 70˚(P) 21-22 31-32 13-14 21-22 31-32 13-14

0

mm 1,5

0,9

&RQWDFWRSHUDWLRQ

25˚ 70˚(P) 21-22 31-32 13-14 21-22 31-32 13-14

0

90˚ 12˚

90˚ 12˚

contact closed (A) = cam displacement (P) = positive opening point contact open N.C. contact with positive opening operation

&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHUJHQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJH 6ZLWFKDFWXDWLRQ 7\SHRIDFWXDWLRQ

On end

By 30° cam

6 0D[LPXPDFWXDWLRQVSHHG 0LQLPXPIRUFHRUWRUTXH

For tripping For positive opening

&RQGXLWHQWU\

7

1.64 ft/s (0.5 m/s) 4.9 ft/s (1.5 m/s) 3.72 lb (15 N) 2.70 lb (12 N) OELQ1‡P 10.12 lb (45 N) 8.09 lb (36 N) OELQ1‡P 1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm 1 entry tapped Pg 13.5 for cable gland, clamping capacity 9 to 12 mm 1 entry tapped for 1/2” NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit

'LPHQVLRQV XCS P3p10ppp

XCS P3p02ppp .49 12.5

.14

.49

8

12.5

.08

Ø.46 Ø11.6

3.5

Ø.28 Ø7

.08 2

2

1.20

.79

30.5

20

2.01

2.56

51

65

9

2.01

2.56

51

65

19

(2)

.75 19

(3)

(3)

.55 1.18 30

10

(2)

.75

(1) Tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5 cable gland or 1/2” NPT conduit. (2) 2 elongated holes Ø.17 x .25 in. (Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm) on .87 in. (22 mm) centers or 2 holes Ø.17 in. ( Ø 4.3 mm) on .79 in. (20 mm) centers. (3) .08 x Ø.12 in. (2 x Ø 3 mm) holes for studs, depth . 16 in. (4 mm).

1.36 34.5

14

(1)

=

.79/.87 20/22

.55

=

1.18 30

1.36

1.34

14

=

(1)

20/22

34

15° 15° .49 12.5 Dual Dimensions:

Characteristics: Page 3/79

3/82

References: Page 3/82

=

1.34

34.5

34

.79/.87

Accessories: Page 3/82

Dimensions: Page 3/82

INCHES Millimieters

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/82

References, characteristics, dimensions (continued)

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV Safety limit switches Compact design, plastic, type XCS P 2

7\SHRIKHDG

3OXQJHU

5RWDU\

1

7\SHRIRSHUDWRU

Metal end plunger

Steel roller plunger

Thermoplastic roller lever

2

Steel roller lever

5HIHUHQFHVRIFRPSOHWHVZLWFKHVZLWKSROH1&1&12EUHDNEHIRUHPDNHVORZEUHDNFRQWDFW :LWK´137FDEOHHQWU\ XCS P3710N12

XCS P3702N12

XCS P3718N12

XCS P3719N12

XCS P3710P20

XCS P3702P20

XCS P3718P20

XCS P3719P20

;&63*

;&63*

;&63*

;&63*

7.585 (0.215)

7.760 (0.220)

8.995 (0.255)

8.995 (0.255)

3

:LWK,620[FDEOHHQWU\

:LWK3JFDEOHHQWU\

:HLJKWR]NJ

4

13 14

21 22

32

31

&RQWDFWIXQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPV 3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. EUHDNEHIRUHPDNH VORZEUHDNFRQWDFW

&RQWDFWRSHUDWLRQ

1,8 3,2(P)

3,1(A) 5,6(P)

21-22 31-32 13-14

21-22 31-32 13-14

0

3

0

5mm

25˚ 70˚(P)

25˚ 70˚(P) 21-22 31-32 13-14

21-22 31-32 13-14

5,2 mm

0

42˚

90˚

0

42˚

90˚

5

contact closed (A) = cam displacement (P) = positive opening point contact open N.C. contact with positive opening operation

&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHUJHQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJH 6ZLWFKDFWXDWLRQ 7\SHRIDFWXDWLRQ

On end

By 30° cam

6 0D[LPXPDFWXDWLRQVSHHG 0LQLPXPIRUFHRUWRUTXH

For tripping For positive opening

&RQGXLWHQWU\

1.64 ft/s (0.5 m/s) 4.9 ft/s (1.5 m/s) 3.72 lb (15 N) 2.70 lb (12 N) OELQ1‡P 10.12 lb (45 N) 8.09 lb (36 N) OELQ1‡P 1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm 1 entry tapped Pg 13.5 for cable gland, clamping capacity 9 to 12 mm 1 entry tapped for 1/2” NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit

7

'LPHQVLRQV XCS P3p18ppp, XCS P3p19ppp 1.57 40

.22 5.5

.94

8

.75

24

Ø19

.49 1.30

12.5

33

.08

2.07

2

2.56 65

52.5

2.01 51

(2)

.75

9

19

(3)

.55 1.18

(1) Tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5 cable gland or 1/2” NPT conduit. (2) 2 elongated holes Ø.17 x .25 in. (Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm) on .87 in. (22 mm) centers or 2 holes Ø.17 in. ( Ø 4.3 mm) on .79 in. (20 mm) centers. (3) .08 x Ø.12 in. (2 x Ø 3 mm) holes for studs, depth . 16 in. (4 mm). Characteristics: Page 3/79

References: Page 3/82

30

1.36

14

=

(1)

.79/.87 20/22

=

1.34 34

34.5

10

15° 15° .49

Dual Dimensions:

12.5

Accessories: Page 3/82

Dimensions: Page 3/82

INCHES Millimieters

Wiring Diagrams: Page 3/82

3/83

Selection guide

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV Light curtains

1

$SSOLFDWLRQV )XQFWLRQV

0DFKLQHWRROPDWHULDOKDQGOLQJDXWRPRWLYHHWF )LQJHUSURWHFWLRQLQPP RUKDQGSURWHFWLRQLQPP

'HYLFH

Light curtains, type 4 Multi-beam, infrared transmission, light curtains (1 transmitter-receiver pair)

Optimum Type

Universal Type

2

3

4

5

6

7

&RQIRUPLW\

Product standards

ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11:19-1990, OSHA 1910.217(C), OSHA 1910.212, EN/IEC 61496-1 and EN/IEC 61496-2 and IEC 61508-1, 2 (Type 4 ESPE)

European directives

Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Work equipment directive 89/655/EEC and EMC directive 89/336 EEC ROHS directive 2002/95/EC

3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV

CE, TUV, UL, CSA

'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ

IP 65

&URVVVHFWLRQ

1.50 x 1.97 in. (38 x 50 mm)

3URWHFWHGKHLJKW

Conforming to EN 999

WRLQWRPP ¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ 12.6 to 83.5 in (320 to 2120 mm) (hand protection)

1RPLQDOVHQVLQJGLVWDQFH

WRIW¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ 1 to 65 ft (hand protection)

5HVSRQVHWLPH

'HSHQGLQJRQKHLJKWSURWHFWHGWRPV¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ Depending on height protected: 23 to 32 ms (hand protection)

7\SHRIRXWSXWV

Safety

2 solid-state PNP outputs (N.O.) c 24 V, ) 625 mA Short-circuit protection

Auxiliary

1 solid-state 100 mA, c 24 V, PNP or NPN output depending on model

8 0DLQIXQFWLRQV

9

-

Auto/manual Test EDM (External Devices Monitoring) Light beam coding

³0XWLQJ´IXQFWLRQ (inhibition of the light curtain “detection” function)

10

-

Auto/manual Test EDM (External Devices Monitoring) Light beam coding %ODQNLQJ¿[HGDQGÀRDWLQJ Cascadable (up to 4 segments) Muting

6XSSO\YROWDJH

c 24 V ± 20%, 2 A

7\SHUHIHUHQFHV

XUSLB

XUSLD

3DJHV

3/92

3/93

3/84

0DFKLQHWRROPDWHULDOKDQGOLQJDXWRPRWLYHHWF )LQJHUSURWHFWLRQLQPP RUKDQGSURWHFWLRQLQPP

1

Light curtains, type 4 Multi-beam, infrared transmission, light curtains (1 transmitter-receiver pair)

Compact model, solid-state safety outputs (PNP)

2

3

4

ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11:19-1990, OSHA 1910.217(C), OSHA 1910.212, type 4 (ESPE) conforming to IEC 61496-1 and 2 Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Work equipment directive 89/655/EEC and EMC directive 89/336 EEC

5

CE, TUV, UL, CSA IP 65 (IP 67 with protection tube) 1.38 x 1.97 in. (35 x 50 mm) WRLQWRPP ¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ 13.8 to 82.5 in. (351 to 2095 mm) (hand protection)

6

WRIWWRP ¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ 0.98 to 29.5 ft (0.3 to 9 m) or 0.98 to 65.7 ft (0.3 to 20 m) (hand protection) 'HSHQGLQJRQKHLJKWSURWHFWHG«PV¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ Depending on height protected: 20…35 ms (hand protection)

7 2 solid-state PNP outputs (N.O.) c 24 V, ) 500 mA Short-circuit protection

8 1 solid-state 100 mA, c 24 V, PNP or NPN output depending on model

Functions integrated in the light curtain: Auto/Manual start and manual 1st cycle, - EDM (external devices monitoring), - test input, - Blanking (ECS/B), Floating Blanking (FB) and Blanking + Floating Blanking, - Muting via external module

9

c 24 V ± 20%, 2 A

10

XUSLT

3/111

3/85

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Selection guide (continued)

Light curtains

1

$SSOLFDWLRQV )XQFWLRQV

3DFNDJLQJFRQYH\RUV\VWHPVPDWHULDOVKDQGOLQJZDUHKRXVLQJVWRFNLQJHWF %RG\SURWHFWLRQDQGPP +DQGSURWHFWLRQLQPP

'HYLFH

Light curtains, type 4

Light curtains, type 2

1 to 6 beam light curtains with infrared transmission (1 transmitter-receiver pair)

Multi-beam light curtains with infrared transmission (1 transmitter-receiver pair)

Type 4 model, solid-state output

Slim, compact model, solid-state output Automatic or manual start

ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11:19-1990, OSHA 1910.217(C), OSHA 1910.212, type 4 (ESPE) conforming to IEC 61496-1 and 2 Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Work equipment directive 89/655/EEC and EMC directive 89/336/ EEC

IEC 61496-1 and IEC 61496-2 type 2 (ESPE)

3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV

CE, TUV, UL, CSA

CE, TUV. UL, CSA

'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ

IP 67

IP 65

&URVVVHFWLRQ

2.05 x 2.17 in. (52 x 55 mm)

1.12 x 1.26 in. (28.5 x 32 mm)

29.53 to 70.87 in. (750 to 1800 mm) (1 to 6 light beams)

5.91 to 59.06 in. (150 to 1500 mm) (hand protection)

1RPLQDOVHQVLQJGLVWDQFH

«PRU«PGSJRQFRQ¿JXUDWLRQ 0.8…8 m for light curtains with passive receiver

0.98 to 49.21 ft (0.3 to 15 m)

5HVSRQVHWLPH

< 16…< 24 ms depending on light beam coding selected

14…24 ms

Safety

2 solid-state PNP outputs (N.O.) c 24 V, ) 650 mA Short-circuit protection

2 solid-state PNP outputs (N.O.) c 24 V, ) 500 mA Short-circuit protection

Auxiliary

1 solid-state 100 mA, c 24 V PNP output

1 x 100 mA, c 24 V PNP alarm output

Functions integrated in the light curtain:

Functions integrated in the light curtain: - automatic or manual start depending on version

2

3

4

&RQIRUPLW\

Product standards

European directives

5

6

7

3URWHFWHGKHLJKW

7\SHRIRXWSXWV

Conforming to EN 999

Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Work equipment directive 89/655/EEC and EMC directive 89/336/ EEC

8 0DLQIXQFWLRQV

Auto/Manual start and manual 1st cycle,

9 ³0XWLQJ´IXQFWLRQ (inhibition of the light curtain “detection” function)

- EDM (external devices monitoring), - test input, - 3 light beam codings available, - Muting via external module

- Muting via external module

6XSSO\YROWDJH

c 24 V ± 20%, 2 A

c 24 V ± 20%, 2 A

7\SHUHIHUHQFHV

XUS LPpppp

;86/1*&pppp;86/1*'pppp

3DJHV

3/119

3/127

10

3/86

3DFNDJLQJFRQYH\RUV\VWHPVPDWHULDOVKDQGOLQJZDUHKRXVLQJVWRFNLQJHWF %RG\SURWHFWLRQ

1

Light curtains, type 2 Single-beam, infrared transmission, light curtains (Preventa™ safety monitoring module + 1 to 4 thru-beam photo-electric sensors)

Type 2 model, relay outputs (N.O.)

2

3

4

IEC 60947-1, EN 61496-1, EN 60825-1, UL 508, type 2 (ESPE) conforming to IEC 61496-1 and 2 Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Work equipment directive 89/655/EEC and EMC directive 89/336/EEC EN 60825-1 (emission class 1)

5

CE type approval BIA/Cologne. UL, CSA IP 67 Ø of sensors: 18 mm 29.5 to 47.2 in. (750 to 1200 mm) (1 to 4 light beams)

6

26.2 ft (8 m)

< 20 ms (sensors + safety module)

7 Solid-state PNP Preventa™ safety module XPS CM outputs 2 guided contact relays, each 1 N.O. AC-15: C300, 1800 VA inrush, 180 VA maintained DC-13: c 24 V/1.5 A, L/R = 50 ms Maximum thermal current = 2.5 A

8

c 24 V, 20 mA

“Muting” integrated in the safety monitoring module XPS CM

9 Safety module XPS CM: c 24 V (19…29 V) Sensors XU2S: c 24 V (10…30 V)

10

XU2 Sppppppp + XPS CM

3/140

3/87

General

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV Light curtains

3UHVHQWDWLRQ

1

2

The absence of a door or guard reduces the time required for loading, inspection or adjustment operations as well as making access easier.

'LUHFWLYHVDQGVWDQGDUGV

&RQIRUPLW\WRVWDQGDUGV 7KHVHOLJKWFXUWDLQVFRQIRUPWR b European Machinery Safety Directive 98/37/EC and European Work Equipment Directive 89/655/EEC, b Low Voltage Directives 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC and also, the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, b Standard EN/IEC 61496-1, EN/IEC 61496-2 (electro-sensitive protection equipment: ESPE), b Standard EN 60825 (emission power), b Standard EN 999/ISO 13855 (installation positioning),

3

4

7KHVHOLJKWFXUWDLQVDUH8/&6$DQG7h9FHUWL¿HG

$SSOLFDWLRQV

0DLQDSSOLFDWLRQV b Applications for type 2 products: - assembly and packaging lines, - conveying and handling lines, - warehousing and storage systems, - waste disposal skips.

5

b Types of machine requiring the use of type 4 products: - presses (all types), shears and trimmers, - hoisting equipment, - saws (all types), - machine tools (lathes, milling machines, machining centers), - woodworking machines (planing machines, lathes, spindle moulding machines, side and face milling cutters), - textile machinery (carding machines, weaving looms, steam rooms), - assembly machines, - assembly robots.

6

7

3URWHFWLRQRISHUVRQQHO Light curtains are electro-sensitive protection equipment (ESPE) designed for the protection of persons operating or working in the vicinity of machinery, by stopping the dangerous movement of parts as soon as one of the light beams is broken. In particular, they provide protection for the VDIHW\RISHUVRQQHO operating dangerous machinery (annex IV of 98/37/EC) but they are equally suitable for use with many other types of machines. They make it possible to protect personnel while allowing free access to machines.

6DIHW\UHTXLUHPHQWV

'HWHFWLRQRIDQRPDOLHV 'HWHFWLRQRIDQRPDOLHVOLDEOHWRFRPSURPLVHVDIHW\DQGVWRSSLQJRIWKH PDFKLQH

8

The design of the machine and its control system must be to the same level of safety as that of the light curtain in order to provide the immediate stopping of the machines dangerous movement as soon as the hazardous zone, protected by the light curtain, is entered.

9

It must not be possible to enter the protected zone without breaking the protective light beams. The light curtain must therefore be installed in such a manner that the light beams cannot be avoided. The machine can only be restarted if no danger exists and no personnel are present in the hazardous zone. The risk that persons might be inside the protected zone but out of the protective light beams must be addressed.

10

3/88

General (continued)

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV Light curtains

)XQFWLRQV

3URWHFWLRQPRGH AUTO/MAN (automatic/manual): this is what standard EN/IEC 61496 calls start (or restart) interlock of the light curtain: b in AUTO mode: on power-up or after the beams have been cleared, the light curtain resets itself automatically (closing of the OSSD output safety circuits), b in MANUAL mode: on power-up or after the beams have been cleared, the light curtain keeps its output safety circuits in the “open” position. Pressing (and releasing) the reset button will cause actual resetting of the light curtain (and closing of its OSSD output safety circuits). 1RWH in all cases, a general start instruction for the machine will trigger its actual start-up.

1

2

0RQLWRULQJRIH[WHUQDOVZLWFKLQJGHYLFHV Also called EDM (External Devices Monitoring) by standard EN/IEC 61496, this consists of monitoring the function (open or closed), together with the time taken to reach that condition, of the machines power switching components.

3

$X[LOLDU\RXWSXW 7KLVLVDORZSRZHUVROLGVWDWHRXWSXWIRUVLJQDOOLQJZKHQFRQ¿JXUDEOH;86/0 XUSLP), to the automation system. This output closes when the light curtain switches to run mode.

4

$ODUP This is a low power solid-state output for signalling to the automation system. This output closes when the light curtain switches to alarm mode.

6LJQDOOLQJ

5

LED display of operating modes and alarm.

$OLJQPHQWDLG Display by visible infrared LED of each beam broken.

0XWLQJLQKLELWLRQ When activated, the “muting” function inhibits the detection function of the light curtain. Activation (or deactivation) is achieved by means of standard sensors (photo-electric or other). When activated, a signal is sent to the automation system. This function is used to allow objects to access the hazardous zones during the process. Signalling informs the operator or operators that they are not protected.

%ODQNLQJ This function makes it possible to inhibit detection by a selected group of light beams in the light curtain (and not all the beams as with muting). This function (adapted to the size of the objects) allows the presence of objects during process operations. Blanking effectively increases the Minimum Object Sensitivity (MOS). This imposes a greater safety distance , increasing the minimum distance between the light curtain and the hazard. In addition, the use of additional protection each side of the object present must be included, in order to prevent any intrusion into the free areas.

)ORDWLQJEODQNLQJ

6

7

8

This function makes it possible to inhibit one or two light beams (adjacent or RWKHUZLVH DQ\ZKHUHLQWKHOLJKWFXUWDLQ7KLVFRQ¿JXUDWLRQLVXVHGIRUH[DPSOHIRU metal plate feeding applications on folding presses or shears.

%ODQNLQJSOXVÀRDWLQJEODQNLQJ 7KH%ODQNLQJ¿[HGLQKLELWLRQRIOLJKWEHDPV DQG)ORDWLQJ%ODQNLQJPRYLQJLQKLELWLRQ of one or two light beams) functions can be combined.

9

10

3/89

Characteristics

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV Safety light curtains, type 4

Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output

/LJKWFXUWDLQW\SH

1

XUSLBQ6Apppp XUSLDMQ6Apppp LQPP

ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11:19-1990, OSHA 1910.217(C), OSHA 1910.212, EN/IEC 61496-1 and EN/IEC 61496-2 and IEC 61508-1, 2 (Type 4 ESPE)

&HUWL¿FDWLRQV

e, TUV, UL, CSA

(XURSHDQGLUHFWLYHV

Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Work equipment directive 89/655/EEC and EMC directive 89/336 EEC ROHS directive 2002/95/EC

$PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH

Operating

ƒ)ƒ&

14…+ 131 (- 10…+ 55)

For storage

ƒ)ƒ&

- 13…+ 167 (- 25…+ 75)

5HODWLYHKXPLGLW\

95% maximum, without condensation

'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ 6KRFNDQGYLEUDWLRQ UHVLVWDQFH

3

XUSLDMY5Appppp LQPP

(QYLURQPHQWFKDUDFWHULVWLFV &RQIRUPLW\WRVWDQGDUGV

2

XUSLBR5Apppp LQPP

IP 65 Conforming to IEC 61496-1

Shock resistance: 10 gn, impulse 16 ms Vibration resistance: 10…55 Hz, amplitude: 0.35 ± 0.05 mm

0DWHULDOV

&DVLQJDOXPLQLXPZLWKHOHFWURVWDWLFDOO\DSSOLHGUHG5$/ SRO\HVWHUSDLQW¿QLVK HQGFDSV¿EHUJODVVLPSUHJQDWHGSRO\FDUERQDWH

0RXQWLQJ

End brackets (included)

2SWLFDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV 0LQLPXPGHWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\026

4

LQPP ¿QJHU

1.18 in. (30 mm) (hand)

1RPLQDOVHQVLQJGLVWDQFH6Q

IWP

1…23 (0.3…7) or 9.8 (3) with PDM (1)

1…26.2 (0.3…8) or 65.6 (20) with PDM (1)

3URWHFWHGKHLJKW

LQ PP

11…53.5 (280…1360)

12.6…83.5 (320…2120)

1…65.6 (0.3…20) or 26.2 (8) with PDM (1)

(IIHFWLYHDSHUWXUHDQJOH($$

2.5° at 9.8ft. (3 m) (3° when used with IP 67 protection tube)

/LJKWVRXUFH

GaAIAs LED, 880 nm

,PPXQLW\WRDPELHQWOLJKW

Conforming to IEC/EN 61496-2

(OHFWULFDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV

5

5HVSRQVHWLPH

0D[LPXPFXUUHQW FRQVXPSWLRQQRORDG

6

7

23…32

c 24 V ± 20% 2 A conforming to EN/IEC 61496 and EN/IEC 60204-1 Transmitter

mA

285

Receiver

A

1.8 (with maximum load)

Transmitter

mA

285

Receiver

mA

450 Conforming to EN 61496-1

6DIHW\RXWSXWV266'(Output Signal Switching Devices)

2 solid-state PNP (N/O) outputs y625 mA, c 24 V (Short-circuit protected)

$X[LOLDU\RXWSXW

1 solid-state output 100 mA, c 24 V, PNP or NPN (depending on model)

0RQLWRULQJDFWLYDWLRQRIRXWSXWVZLWFKLQJGHYLFHV 03&(('0

50 mA, c 24 V and start/restart 10 mA

6LJQDOOLQJ

Transmitter

1 LED (power supply)

Receiver

4 LEDs (stop, run, interlock, ECS/B Blanking or FB Floating Blanking)

Transmitter

M12, 5-pin, female connector

&RQQHFWLRQV(2) Light curtains

XPSLCM1 3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUVFVD -XPSHUFDEOHVFVD

Receiver

M12, 8-pin, female connector

Transmitter/Receiver

0SLQIHPDOHFRQQHFWRURQÀ\LQJOHDG

Receiver

M12, 4-pin, female connector

Transmitter/Receiver

22 AWG (0.32 mm2) conductors with M12, 5-pin, male connector

Receiver

22 AWG (0.32 mm2) conductors with M12, 8-pin, male connector 22 AWG (0.32 mm2) conductors with M12, 4-pin, male/female connectors

Transmitter/receiver

&DEOHUHVLVWDQFHRISUHZLUHG Transmitter/receiver FRQQHFWRUV &DEOHOHQJWKV

9

23…41

,PPXQLW\WRLQWHUIHUHQFH

Segments XUSLDS

8

PV

3RZHUVXSSO\

1

0.1686 per ft. (0.05531 per m) Pre-wired connectors with cable lengths of 16.4, 32.8, 49.2, and 98.4 ft (5, 10, 15 and 30 m) are available separately. The maximum cable length is 196.9 ft (60 m), depending on the load current and power supply.

(1) PDM: Programming and Diagnostic Module, available as option, see page 3/96. (2) Pre-wired connectors to be ordered separately, see page 3/96.

10 Principle: page 3/88

3/90

Characteristics: page 3/90

References: page 3/92

Dimensions: page 3/98

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/100

Characteristics (continued)

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV Safety light curtains, type 4

Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output

/LJKWFXUWDLQW\SH

XUSLBpppppp

XUSLDMppppp

)XQFWLRQV )XQFWLRQV

Accessible by cabling alone (1)

v v v v v

Accessible via programming and diagnostic module

v Auto/Manual v Monitoring of external switching devices (EDM: External Device Monitoring) v Light beam coding (A or B) v Sensing distance (short, long) v Programming and downloading of FRQ¿JXUDWLRQVHWWLQJVYLDSURJUDPPLQJ and diagnostic module (PDM) v Display of operating modes and anomalies by LED and/or PDM (2)

1

Automatic start Auxiliary output (PNP, status signalling) Test (MTS: Monitoring Test Signal) Alignment aid by display of each light beam broken LED display of operating modes and anomalies v Auto/Manual, manual 1st cycle v Monitoring of external switching devices (EDM: External Device Monitoring) v Blanking (ECS/B) v Monitored Blanking v Floating Blanking (FB) v Reduction of resolution v Response time (normal, slow) v Light beam coding (A or B) v Sensing distance (short, long) v Auxiliary output (alarm or status signalling, PNP or NPN) v Start button (N/O or N/C, 0 V or 24 V) v Muting (see page 18) v Cascadable versions with up to 4 segments total (256 light beams max., PRGXODU¿QJHUKDQG XVLQJVHJPHQWV XUSLDS v Programming and downloading of FRQ¿JXUDWLRQVHWWLQJVYLDSURJUDPPLQJ and diagnostic module (PDM) v Display of operating modes and anomalies by LED and/or PDM (2)

0RQLWRULQJRIH[WHUQDOVZLWFKLQJGHYLFHV (EDM = External Device Monitoring)

Monitoring of the function (open or closed) as well as the response time of the power components.

³7HVW´IXQFWLRQ

Instigates the stop instruction of the light curtain by opening the contact (simulated intrusion) v With external module XPSLCM1150 v Integrated when using connection module XPSLCM1 for connecting sensors and “muting” indicator light v or with module XPSLCM1150

³0XWLQJ´IXQFWLRQ(inhibition)

2

3

4

5

6

(1) Not requiring use of PDM. (2) PDM: Programming and Diagnostic Module, available as option, see page 3/96.

7

8

9

10 Principle: page 3/88

Characteristics: page 3/90

References: page 3/92

Dimensions: page 3/98

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/100

3/91

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

References

Safety light curtains, type 4

Light curtains Optimum XUSLB with solid-state output

7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRU¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ(1) 'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP 6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHWRIWWRP  RUIWP ZLWK3'0  b 2 PNP safety outputs

1

3URWHFWHG KHLJKW LQPP

2

3 XUSLBQ6Apppp

4

5HVSRQVH WLPH

1XPEHURI OLJKWEHDPV

$X[LOLDU\ 5HIHUHQFH RXWSXW (2)

:HLJKW

PV

OENJ

11 (280)

23

24

PNP

XUSLBQ6A0280

3.95 (1.790)

12.6 (320)

23

32

PNP

XUSLBQ6A0320

4.34 (1.970)

14.2 (360)

23

36

PNP

XUSLBQ6A0360

4.74 (2.150)

17.3 (440)

23

44

PNP

XUSLBQ6A0440

5.51 (2.500)

20.5 (520)

23

52

PNP

XUSLBQ6A0520

6.33 (2.870)

23.6 (600)

23

60

PNP

XUSLBQ6A0600

7.10 (3.220)

28.3 (720)

32

72

PNP

XUSLBQ6A0720

8.29 (3.760)

29.9 (760)

32

76

PNP

XUSLBQ6A0760

8.69 (3.940)

34.6 (880)

32

88

PNP

XUSLBQ6A0880

9.85 (4.470)

36.2 (920)

32

92

PNP

XUSLBQ6A0920

10.25 (4.650)

37.8 (960)

32

96

PNP

XUSLBQ6A0960

10.65 (4.830)

40.9 (1040)

32

104

PNP

XUSLBQ6A1040

11.44 (5.190)

44.1 (1120)

32

112

PNP

XUSLBQ6A1120

12.21 (5.540)

47.2 (1200)

32

120

PNP

XUSLBQ6A1200

13.01 (5.900)

53.5 (1360)

41

136

PNP

XUSLBQ6A1360

13.62 (6.180)

7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRUKDQGSURWHFWLRQ(1) 'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP 6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHWRIWWRP  RUIWP ZLWK3'0  b 2 PNP safety outputs

5

6

7 XUSLBR5Apppp

8

3URWHFWHG KHLJKW

5HVSRQVH WLPH

LQPP

PV

12.6 (320)

23

1XPEHURI OLJKWEHDPV

$X[LOLDU\ 5HIHUHQFH RXWSXW (2)

16

PNP

:HLJKW OENJ

XUSLBR5A0320

4.34 (1.970)

14.2 (360)

23

18

PNP

XUSLBR5A0360

4.74 (2.150)

17.3 (440)

23

22

PNP

XUSLBR5A0440

5.51 (2.500)

20.5 (520)

23

26

PNP

XUSLBR5A0520

6.33 (2.870)

23.6 (600)

23

30

PNP

XUSLBR5A0600

7.10 (3.220)

26.8 (680)

23

34

PNP

XUSLBR5A0680

7.89 (3.580)

29.9 (760)

23

38

PNP

XUSLBR5A0760

8.69 (3.940)

34.6 (880)

23

44

PNP

XUSLBR5A0880

9.85 (4.470)

36.2 (920)

23

46

PNP

XUSLBR5A0920

10.25 (4.650)

40.9 (1040)

23

52

PNP

XUSLBR5A1040

11.44 (5.190)

47.2 (1200)

23

60

PNP

XUSLBR5A1200

13.01 (5.900)

53.5 (1360)

23

68

PNP

XUSLBR5A1360

14.59 (6.620)

55.1 (1400)

23

70

PNP

XUSLBR5A1400

14.99 (6.800)

59.8 (1520)

32

76

PNP

XUSLBR5A1520

16.16 (7.330)

61.4 (1560)

32

78

PNP

XUSLBR5A1560

16.53 (7.500)

64.6 (1640)

32

82

PNP

XUSLBR5A1640

17.35 (7.870)

67.7 (1720)

32

86

PNP

XUSLBR5A1720

18.14 (8.230)

70.9 (1800)

32

88

PNP

XUSLBR5A1800

18.94 (8.590)

75.6 (1920)

32

96

PNP

XUSLBR5A1920

20.11 (9.120)

83.5 (2120)

32

106

PNP

XUSLBR5A2120 22.09 (10.020)

(1) Supplied with a test rod, 2 sets of 2 brackets with mounting hardware, user guide with FHUWL¿FDWHRIFRQIRUPLW\RQ&'520DQGDUFVXSSUHVVRUVHW Programming and Diagnostic Module (if required) and pre-wired connectors to be ordered separately, see page 3/96. (2) To order a receiver only, add the letter R to the end of the reference for the corresponding transmitter-receiver pair. Example: reference XUSLBR5A0320 becomes XUSLBR5A0320R for the receiver only. To order a transmitter only, add the letter T to the end of the reference for the corresponding transmitter-receiver pair. Example: reference XUSLBR5A0320 becomes XUSLBR5A0320T for the transmitter only.

9

10

2WKHUYHUVLRQV

Combining type 4 safety light curtains with external module for muting function (see page 2/218)..

6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWVDQGDFFHVVRULHVSDJH Principle: page 3/88

3/92

Characteristics: page 3/90

References: page 3/92

Dimensions: page 3/98

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/100

References (continued)

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV Safety light curtains, type 4

Light curtains Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output

7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRU¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ(1) 'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP 6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHWRIWWRP  RUIWP ZLWK3'0  b 2 PNP safety outputs 3URWHFWHG 5HVSRQVHWLPH KHLJKW 1RUPDO Slow LQPP 11 (280)

XUSLDMQpppp

PV

PV

23

38

1XPEHU RIOLJKW EHDPV

$X[LOLDU\ RXWSXW

5HIHUHQFH (2)

24

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMQ6A0280

1

:HLJKW

OENJ 3.95 (1.790)

12.6 (320)

23

38

32

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMQ6A0320

4.34 (1.970)

14.2 (360)

23

38

36

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMQ6A0360

4.74 (2.150)

17.3 (440)

23

38

44

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMQ6A0440

5.51 (2.500)

20.5 (520)

23

38

52

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMQ6A0520

6.39 (2.900)

23.6 (600)

23

38

60

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMQ6A0600

7.10 (3.220)

28.3 (720)

32

53

72

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMQ6A0720

8.29 (3.760)

29.9 (760)

32

53

76

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMQ6A0760

8.69 (3.940)

34.6 (880)

32

53

88

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMQ6A0880

9.85 (4.470)

36.2 (920)

32

53

92

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMQ6A0920 10.25 (4.650)

37.8 (960)

32

53

96

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMQ6A0960 10.65 (4.830)

40.9 (1040) 32

53

104

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMQ6A1040 11.44 (5.190)

44.1 (1120) 32

53

112

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMQ6A1120 12.21 (5.540)

47.2 (1200) 32

53

120

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMQ6A1200 13.01 (5.900)

53.5 (1360) 41

68

136

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMQ6A1360 14.59 (6.620)

2

3

4

7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRUKDQGSURWHFWLRQ(1) 'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP 6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHWRIWWRP  RUIWP ZLWK3'0  b 2 PNP safety outputs 3URWHFWHG 5HVSRQVHWLPH KHLJKW 1RUPDO Slow

XUSLDMYpppp

LQPP

PV

12.6 (320)

23

1XPEHU $X[LOLDU\ RIOLJKW RXWSXW EHDPV

5HIHUHQFH (2)

16

XUSLDMY5A0320

:HLJKW

OENJ 38

PNP/NPN

4.34 (1.970)

14.2 (360)

23

38

18

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A0360

4.74 (2.150)

17.3 (440)

23

38

22

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A0440

5.51 (2.500)

20.5 (520)

23

38

26

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A0520

6.33 (2.870)

23.6 (600)

23

38

30

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A0600

7.10 (3.220)

26.8 (680)

23

38

34

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A0680

7.89 (3.580)

29.9 (760)

23

38

38

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A0760

8.69 (3.940)

34.6 (880)

23

38

44

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A0880

9.85 (4.470)

36.2 (920)

23

38

46

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A0920

10.25 (4.650)

40.9 (1040) 23

38

52

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A1040

11.44 (5.190)

47.2 (1200) 23

38

60

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A1200

13.01 (5.900)

53.5 (1360) 23

38

68

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A1360

14.59 (6.620)

55.1 (1400) 23

38

70

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A1400

14.99 (6.800)

59.8 (1520) 32

53

76

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A1520

16.16 (7.330)

61.4 (1560) 32

53

78

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A1560

16.53 (7.500)

64.6 (1640) 32

53

82

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A1640

17.35 (7.870)

67.7 (1720) 32

53

86

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A1720

18.14 (8.230)

70.9 (1800) 32

53

88

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A1800

18.94 (8.590) 20.11 (9.120)

75.6 (1920) 32

53

96

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A1920

83.5 (2120) 32

53

106

PNP/NPN

XUSLDMY5A2120 22.09 (10.020)

(1) Supplied with a test rod, 2 sets of 2 brackets with mounting hardware, user guide with FHUWL¿FDWHRIFRQIRUPLW\RQ&'520DQGDUFVXSSUHVVRUVHW Programming and Diagnostic Module (if required) and pre-wired connectors to be ordered separately, see page 3/96. (2) To order a receiver only, add the letter R to the end of the reference for the corresponding transmitter-receiver pair. Example: reference XUSLDMY5A0320 becomes XUSLDMY5A0320R for the receiver only. To order a transmitter only, add the letter T to the end of the reference for the corresponding transmitter-receiver pair. Example: reference XUSLDMY5A0320 becomes XUSLDMY5A0320T for the transmitter only. 2WKHUYHUVLRQV

Combining type 4 safety light curtains with external module for muting function (see page 2/218).

6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWVDQGDFFHVVRULHVSDJH Principle: page 3/88

Characteristics: page 3/90

References: page 3/92

5

Dimensions: page 3/98

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/100

3/93

6

7

8

9

10

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Presentation

Safety light curtains, type 4

Segments XUSLDS for Universal XUSLDM light curtains

6HJPHQWVIRUFDVFDGDEOH8QLYHUVDOOLJKWFXUWDLQV Cascadable versions with up to 4 segments total (256 light beams max., modular ¿QJHUKDQG XVLQJVHJPHQWV;86/'6

1

&RQ¿JXUDWLRQRIVHJPHQWV;86/'6 7ZRVHJPHQWV 1XPEHURIOLJKWEHDPV

5HVSRQVHWLPH PV

2

0 to 65

23

66 to 120

32

121 to 174

41

175 to 229

50

230 to 256

59

7KUHHVHJPHQWV

3

1XPEHURIOLJKWEHDPV

5HVSRQVHWLPH PV

XUSLDM + XUSLDS

4

0 to 59

23

60 to 114

32

115 to 168

41

169 to 223

50

224 to 256

59

)RXUVHJPHQWV 1XPEHURIOLJKWEHDPV

5HVSRQVHWLPH PV

5

0 to 53

23

54 to 108

32

109 to 162

41

163 to 217

50

218 to 256

59

6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWVDQGDFFHVVRULHVSDJH

6

7

8

9

10 Principle: page 3/88

3/94

Characteristics: page 3/90

References: page 3/92

Dimensions: page 3/98

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/100

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

References

Safety light curtains, type 4

Segments XUSLDS for Universal XUSLDM light curtains

7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRU¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ(1) 'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP 6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHGHSHQGLQJRQ ;86/'0OLJKWFXUWDLQXVHG b Segments for cascadable Universal light curtains (2) 3URWHFWHG KHLJKW

1XPEHURI OLJKWEHDPV

5HIHUHQFH (3)

24

XUSLDSQ6A0280

:HLJKW

LQPP 11 (280)

XUSLDSQ6Apppp

1 OENJ

3.95 (1.790)

12.6 (320)

32

XUSLDSQ6A0320

4.34 (1.970)

14.2 (360)

36

XUSLDSQ6A0360

4.74 (2.150)

17.3 (440)

44

XUSLDSQ6A0440

5.51 (2.500)

20.5 (520)

52

XUSLDSQ6A0520

6.33 (2.870)

23.6 (600)

60

XUSLDSQ6A0600

7.10 (3.220)

28.3 (720)

72

XUSLDSQ6A0720

8.29 (3.760)

29.9 (760)

76

XUSLDSQ6A0760

8.69 (3.940)

34.6 (880)

88

XUSLDSQ6A0880

9.85 (4.470)

36.2 (920)

92

XUSLDSQ6A0920

10.25 (4.650) 10.65 (4.830)

37.8 (960)

96

XUSLDSQ6A0960

40.9 (1040)

104

XUSLDSQ6A1040

11.44 (5.190)

44.1 (1120)

112

XUSLDSQ6A1120

12.21 (5.540)

47.2 (1200)

120

XUSLDSQ6A1200

13.01 (5.900)

2

3

4

7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRUKDQGSURWHFWLRQ(1) 'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP 6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHGHSHQGLQJRQ;86/'0 OLJKWFXUWDLQXVHG b Segments for cascadable Universal light curtains (2) 3URWHFWHG KHLJKW

1XPEHURI OLJKWEHDPV

5HIHUHQFH (3)

16

XUSLDSY5A0320

:HLJKW

LQPP 12.6 (320)

XUSLDSY5Apppp

OENJ

14.2 (360)

18

XUSLDSY5A0360

4.74 (2.150)

17.3 (440)

22

XUSLDSY5A0440

5.51 (2.500)

20.5 (520)

26

XUSLDSY5A0520

6.33 (2.870)

23.6 (600)

30

XUSLDSY5A0600

7.10 (3.220)

26.8 (680)

34

XUSLDSY5A0680

7.89 (3.580)

29.9 (760)

38

XUSLDSY5A0760

8.69 (3.940)

34.6 (880)

44

XUSLDSY5A0880

9.85 (4.470)

36.2 (920)

46

XUSLDSY5A0920

10.25 (4.650)

40.9 (1040)

52

XUSLDSY5A1040

11.44 (5.190)

47.2 (1200)

60

XUSLDSY5A1200

13.01 (5.900)

53.5 (1360)

68

XUSLDSY5A1360

14.59 (6.620)

55.1 (1400)

70

XUSLDSY5A1400

14.99 (6.800)

59.8 (1520)

76

XUSLDSY5A1520

16.16 (7.330)

61.4 (1560)

78

XUSLDSY5A1560

16.53 (7.500)

64.6 (1640)

82

XUSLDSY5A1640

17.35 (7.870)

67.7 (1720)

86

XUSLDSY5A1720

18.14 (8.230) 18.94 (8.590)

70.9 (1800)

88

XUSLDSY5A1800

75.6 (1920)

96

XUSLDSY5A1920

20.11 (9.120)

83.5 (2120)

106

XUSLDSY5A2120

22.09 (10.020)

(1) Supplied with 2 sets of 2 brackets and hardware. Jumper cables to be ordered separately, see 3/96. (2) The segments are to be connected to the M12 4-pin connector on top of the XUSLDM light curtains. (3) To order a receiver only, add the letter R to the end of the reference for the corresponding transmitter-receiver pair. Example: reference XUSLDSY5A0320 becomes XUSLDSY5A0320R for the receiver only. To order a transmitter only, add the letter T to the end of the reference for the corresponding transmitter-receiver pair. Example: reference XUSLDSY5A0320 becomes XUSLDSY5A0320T for the transmitter only.

6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWVDQGDFFHVVRULHVSDJH

Principle: page 3/88

Characteristics: page 3/90

References: page 3/92

Dimensions: page 3/98

5

4.34 (1.970)

6

7

8

9

10

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/100

3/95

References (continued)

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

0

Safety light curtains, type 4

Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and Universal XUSLDM/LDS with solid-state output

6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWV 3RZHUVXSSOLHVƒPLUURUDGDSWRUVSURWHFWLYHFRYHUVDQWLYLEUDWLRQNLW PRXQWLQJEDVHVODVHUDOLJQPHQWWRRO

1

3/97 and 3/130 to 3/137.

$FFHVVRULHV 'HVFULSWLRQ

)RUXVHZLWK

/HQJWK

5HIHUHQFH

IWP

2

3

563528

XUSLPDM

3URJUDPPLQJDQG 'LDJQRVWLF0RGXOH3'0

Light curtains XUSLB/LDM

+ROGHUPRXQW

3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUV IRUOLJKWFXUWDLQV ;86/%;86/'0

4 XSZ BCTpp

XSZ BCRpp

-XPSHUFDEOHV IRUVHJPHQWV;86/'6 M12 male/female, 4-pin, straight

0.62 (0.280)

Programming and – diagnostic module XUSLPDM

XUSLZPDM

0.09 (0.040)

Transmitter type

Transmitter type

5 Receiver type

6 -XPSHUVIRUUHSODFHPHQWRI OLJKWFXUWDLQV;86/7E\ XUSLB or XUSLDM

9

XSZBCT05

0.86 (0.390)

32.8 (10) XSZBCT10

1.52 (0.690)

49.2 (15) XSZBCT15

2.27 (1.030)

98.4 (30) XSZBCT30

4.25 (1.930)

16.4 (5)

XSZBCR05

0.99 (0.450)

32.8 (10) XSZBCR10

1.72 (0.780)

49.2 (15) XSZBCR15

2.43 (1.100)

98.4 (30) XSZBCR30

5.03 (2.280)

XSZDCT003

0.11 (0.050)

1.6 (0.5) XSZDCT005

1 (0.3)

0.15 (0.070)

3.3 (1)

XSZDCT010

0.24 (0.110)

6.6 (2)

XSZDCT020

0.46 (0.210)

9.9 (3)

XSZDCT030

0.66 (0.300)

16.4 (5)

XSZDCT050

1.08 (0.490)

32.8 (10) XSZDCT100

2.09 (0.950)

1 (0.3)

XSZDCR003

0.11 (0.050)

1.6 (0.5) XSZDCR005

0.15 (0.070)

3.3 (1)

XSZDCR010

0.24 (0.110)

6.6 (2)

XSZDCR020

0.46 (0.210)

9.9 (3)

XSZDCR030

0.66 (0.300)

16.4 (5)

XSZDCR050

1.08 (0.490)

32.8 (10) XSZDCR100

2.12 (0.960)

XSZTBDMCT003 0.13 (0.060)

Receiver type Male/ 1 (0.3) Female 8 pins

XSZTBDMCR003 0.13 (0.060)

)RUXVHZLWK

8QLWUHIHUHQFH

5HSODFHPHQWFDSV IRU0FRQQHFWRU 6ROGLQORWVRI

Light curtains XUSLDM and segments XUSLDS

XUSLZ600

0.002 (0.001)

5HSODFHPHQWFDSV IRU0FRQQHFWRU (programming and diagnostic module XUSLPDM connection to light curtains) 6ROGLQORWVRI

Light curtains XUSLB/LDM and segments XUSLDS

XUSLZ610

0.02 (0.010)

PRXQWLQJNLW(2 brackets)

Light curtains XUSLB/LDM and segments XUSLDS

XUSLZ228

0.22 (0.100)

6OLGLQJQXWV(4 nuts) for rear or side mounting with XUSLZ228

Light curtains XUSLB/LDM

XUSLZ330

0.09 (0.040)

$UFVXSSUHVVRU(pair)

All types of light curtain

XUSLZ500

0.04 (0.020)

'HVFULSWLRQ

Transmitter type Male/Female 5 pins

16.4 (5)

1 (0.3)

7

8

OENJ XUSLPDM

Receiver type

–

,3SURWHFWLRQWXEH (see page 3/97) 8VHUJXLGHRQ CD-ROM

10

3/96

:HLJKW

:HLJKW OENJ

– All types of light curtain

XUSLZ450

0.02 (0.010)

&RQQHFWLRQPRGXOHIRUVHQVRUV Light curtains XUSLDM DQG0XWLQJLQGLFDWRUOLJKW (see page 3/104)

XPSLCM1

0.42 (0.190)

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Characteristics, references

0

Safety light curtains, type 4

Protection tubes for light curtains with solid-state output XUSLB/XUSLDM and segments XUSLDS

,3SURWHFWLRQWXEHVIRUOLJKWFXUWDLQV;86/%;86/'0 DQGVHJPHQWV;86/'6

XUSLZD7pppp

1

(QYLURQPHQWFKDUDFWHULVWLFV $LUWHPSHUDWXUH

For operation

ƒ)ƒ&

32...+ 104 (0...+ 40)

For storage

ƒ)ƒ&

- 13...+ 158 (- 25...+ 70)

'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ

IP 67 conforming to IEC 60529

0DWHULDO

Acrylic

6HQVLQJGLVWDQFH (Sn)UHGXFWLRQFRHI¿FLHQW

0.90

2

(QYLURQPHQWDOFKHPLFDOV &KHPLFDOUHVLVWDQFH

Aliphatic hydrocarbons

Resistant

Alkalis

3

Aqueous solutions Detergents and cleaners Inorganic diluted acids Chlorinated or aromatic hydrocarbons

Limited resistance

Esters Ketones (QYLURQPHQWDO UHVLVWDQFH

Adverse weather, sunlight (UV)

4

Resistant

Humidity Immersion in water

5HIHUHQFHVRI,3SURWHFWLRQWXEHV 108048

'HVFULSWLRQ

+HLJKW LQPP

5HIHUHQFH

,3SURWHFWLRQWXEHVIRU XUSLpp6A0280 ;86/%/'0WUDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHU XUSLpppA0320 SDLUDQGVHJPHQWV XUSLpppA0360 XUSLDSppp

11.2 (284.4)

XUSLZD70280

5.84 (2.650)

12.8 (324.8)

XUSLZD70320

6.19 (2.810)

14.4 (364.5)

XUSLZD70360

6.53 (2.960)

6Q (1) 6ROGLQORWVRI

XUSLpppA0440

17.5 (443.9)

XUSLZD70440

7.21 (3.270)

XUSLpppA0520

20.6 (523.4)

XUSLZD70520

7.89 (3.580)

XUSLpppA0600

23.8 (604.1)

XUSLZD70600

8.58 (3.890)

XUSLpp5A0680

26.9 (683.6)

XUSLZD70680

9.24 (4.190)

XUSLpp6A0720

28.5 (724)

XUSLZD70720

9.59 (4.350)

XUSLpppA0760

30 (763)

XUSLZD70760

9.92 (4.500)

XUSLpppA0880

34.8 (882.8)

XUSLZD70880

10.93 (4.960)

XUSLpppA0920

36.3 (922.5)

XUSLZD70920

11.28 (5.120)

XUSLpp6A0960

37.9 (963.6)

XUSLZD70960

11.62 (5.270)

XUSLpppA1040

41.1 (1042.9)

XUSLZD71040

12.30 (5.580)

XUSLpp6A1120

44.2 (1122.3)

XUSLZD71120

12.99 (5.890)

XUSLpppA1200

47.4 (1203.8)

XUSLZD71200

13.67 (6.200)

XUSLpppA1360

53.6 (1362)

XUSLZD71360

15.01 (6.810)

XUSLpp5A1400

55.2 (1401.7)

XUSLZD71400

15.37 (6.970)

XUSLZD7ppp

)RUXVHZLWK

:HLJKW OENJ

XUSLpp5A1520

59.9 (1521.5)

XUSLZD71520

16.38 (7.430)

XUSLpp5A1560

61.5 (1563.3)

XUSLZD71560

16.71 (7.580)

XUSLpp5A1640

64.6 (1641.3)

XUSLZD71640

17.89 (7.890)

XUSLpp5A1720

67.7 (1720.8)

XUSLZD71720

18.08 (8.200)

XUSLpp5A1800

71 (1802.9)

XUSLZD71800

18.76 (8.510)

XUSLpp5A1920

75.7 (1922.8)

XUSLZD71920

19.78 (8.970)

XUSLpp5A2120

83.5 (2120.7)

XUSLZD72120

21.47 (9.740)

5

6

7

8

9

 6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHUHGXFWLRQFRHI¿FLHQWWREHWDNHQLQWRDFFRXQWIRUHDFKSDLURI,3SURWHFWLRQWXEHVXVHG

10 Characteristics:: page 3/97

References: page 3/97

Dimensions: page 3/99

3/97

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV 3UHYHQWDŒ

Dimensions

Safety light curtains, type 4

Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output /LJKWFXUWDLQV

1

3URJUDPPLQJDQG GLDJQRVWLFPRGXOH

XUSLB 2.08 52.8

XUSLDM 1.93

(1)

2.08

49.1

52.8

2.31

2.31

58.6

58.6

XUSLPDM 1.93

(1)

49.1

2.56

2.31

2.31

58.6

58.6

65

0.06...0.2

2

1.46

1.55 39.4

2.07

1.46

1.55

37.2

39.4

1.50

1.5...5

5.16

53

37.2

131

1.50

38

38

1.97

1.97

50

b

b1

H

b

H

b1

50

3 2.28

2.28

58

58

1.46

1.46

37.2

37.2

4

3.04

3.04

77.3

77.3

(3)

1.50

(2)

38.1

(3)

1.50

(2)

38.1

2.42

2.42

61.5

61.5

2.33

2.33

59.3

5

59.3

2.33

2.33

59.2

59.2 Dual Dimensions:

90°

XUS

6

7

8

9

10

b

90°

b1

H

3URWHFWHG KHLJKW

XUS

b

INCHES Millimieters

b1

H

3URWHFWHG KHLJKW

LBppp0280

11.2 (284.4)

16.6 (420.4)

15 (381.7)

11 (280)

LDMpp0280

11.2 (284.4)

16.6 (420.4)

15 (381.7)

11 (280)

LBppp0320

12.8 (324.8)

18.1 (460.8)

16.6 (422.1)

12.6 (320)

LDMpp0320

12.8 (324.8)

18.1 (460.8)

16.6 (422.1)

12.6 (320)

LBppp0360

14.4 (364.5)

19.7 (500.5)

18.2 (461.8)

14.2 (360)

LDMpp0360

14.4 (364.5)

19.7 (500.5)

18.2 (461.8)

14.2 (360)

LBppp0440

17.5 (443.9)

22.8 (579.9)

21.3 (541.2)

17.3 (440)

LDMpp0440

17.5 (443.9)

22.8 (579.9)

21.3 (541.2)

17.3 (440)

LBppp0520

20.6 (523.4)

26 (659.4)

24.4 (620.7)

20.5 (520)

LDMpp0520

20.6 (523.4)

26 (659.4)

24.4 (620.7)

20.5 (520)

LBppp0600

23.8 (604.1)

29.1 (740.1)

27.6 (701.4)

23.6 (600)

LDMpp0600

23.8 (604.1)

29.1 (740.1)

27.6 (701.4)

23.6 (600)

LBppp0680

26.9 (683.6)

32.3 (819.6)

30.7 (780.9)

26.8 (680)

LDMpp0680

26.9 (683.6)

32.3 (819.6)

30.7 (780.9)

26.8 (680)

LBppp0720

28.5 (724)

33.9 (860)

32.3 (821.3)

28.3 (720)

LDMpp0720

28.5 (724)

33.9 (860)

32.3 (821.3)

28.3 (720)

LBppp0760

30 (763)

35.4 (899)

33.9 (860.3)

29.9 (760)

LDMpp0760

30 (763)

35.4 (899)

33.9 (860.3)

29.9 (760)

LBppp0880

34.8 (882.8)

40.1 (1018.8) 38.6 (980.1)

34.6 (880)

LDMpp0880

34.8 (882.8)

40.1 (1018.8)

38.6 (980.1)

34.6 (880)

LBppp0920

36.3 (922.5)

41.7 (1058.5) 40.1 (1019.8) 36.2 (920)

LDMpp0920

36.3 (922.5)

41.7 (1058.5)

40.1 (1019.8)

36.2 (920)

LBppp0960

37.9 (963.6)

43.3 (1099.6) 41.8 (1060.9) 37.8 (960)

LDMpp0960

37.9 (963.6)

43.3 (1099.6)

41.8 (1060.9)

37.8 (960)

LBppp1040

41.1 (1042.9)

46.4 (1178.9)

LDMpp1040

41.1 (1042.9) 46.4 (1178.9)

44.9 (1140.2)

40.9 (1040)

LBppp1120

44.2 (1122.3)

49.5 (1258.3) 48 (1219.6)

44.1 (1120)

LDMpp1120

44.2 (1122.3) 49.5 (1258.3)

48 (1219.6)

44.1 (1120)

LBppp1200

47.4 (1203.8)

52.7 (1339.8) 51.2 (1301.1) 47.2 (1200)

LDMpp1200

47.4 (1203.8) 52.7 (1339.8)

51.2 (1301.1)

47.2 (1200)

LBppp1360

53.6 (1362)

59 (1498)

LDMpp1360

53.6 (1362)

57.5 (1459.3)

53.5 (1360)

LBppp1400

55.2 (1401.7)

60.5 (1537.7) 59 (1499)

55.1 (1400)

LDMpp1400

55.2 (1401.7) 60.5 (1537.7)

59 (1499)

55.1 (1400)

LBppp1520

59.9 (1521.5)

65.3 (1657.5) 63.7 (1618.8) 59.8 (1520)

LDMpp1520

59.9 (1521.5) 65.3 (1657.5)

63.7 (1618.8)

59.8 (1520)

LBppp1560

61.5 (1563.3)

66.9 (1699.3) 65.4 (1660.6) 61.4 (1560)

LDMpp1560

61.5 (1563.3) 66.9 (1699.3)

65.4 (1660.6)

61.4 (1560)

LBppp1640

64.6 (1641.3)

70 (1777.3)

68.4 (1738.6) 64.6 (1640)

LDMpp1640

64.6 (1641.3) 70 (1777.3)

68.4 (1738.6)

64.6 (1640)

LBppp1720

67.7 (1720.8)

73.1 (1856.8) 71.6 (1818.1) 67.7 (1720)

LDMpp1720

67.7 (1720.8) 73.1 (1856.8)

71.6 (1818.1)

67.7 (1720)

LBppp1800

71 (1802.9)

76.3 (1938.9) 74.8 (1900.2) 70.9 (1800)

LDMpp1800

71 (1802.9)

76.3 (1938.9)

74.8 (1900.2)

70.9 (1800)

LBppp1920

75.7 (1922.8)

81.1 (2058.8) 79.5 (2020.1) 75.6 (1920)

LDMpp1920

75.7 (1922.8) 81.1 (2058.8)

79.5 (2020.1)

75.6 (1920)

LBppp2120

83.5 (2120.7)

88.8 (2256.7) 87.3 (2217.3) 83.5 (2120)

LDMpp2120

83.5 (2120.7) 88.8 (2256.7)

87.3 (2217.3)

83.5 (2120)

44.9 (1140.2) 40.9 (1040)

57.5 (1459.3) 53.5 (1360)

59 (1498)

(1) 2 elongated holes 0.73 x 0.27 in (18.5 x 6.8 mm). (2) 4 elongated holes 0.91 x 0.27 in (23.2 x 6.8 mm). (3) M12 male connector on 10.6 in. (0.27 m) pigtail.

Principle: page 3/88

3/98

Characteristics: page 3/90

References: page 3/90

Dimensions: page 3/98

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/100

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV 3UHYHQWDŒ

Dimensions (continued)

Safety light curtains, type 4

Segments XUSLDS for Universal XUSLDM light curtains Protection tube &DVFDGDEOHVHJPHQWV XUSLDS XUSLDS

1.55

XUS

39.4

2.31

15.8 (401.5)

15 (381.7)

14.3 (363.1) 11 (280)

16.6 (422.1)

15.9 (403.5) 12.6 (320)

LDSppp0360 14.4 (364.5)

19.7 (500.5)

19 (482)

18.2 (461.8)

17.4 (443.2) 14.2 (360)

LDSppp0440 17.5 (443.9)

22.8 (579.9)

22.1 (561.4)

21.3 (541.2)

20.6 (522.6) 17.3 (440)

LDSppp0520 20.6 (523.4)

26 (659.4)

25.2 (640.9)

24.4 (620.7)

23.7 (602.1) 20.5 (520)

LDSppp0600 23.8 (604.1)

29.1 (740.1)

28.4 (721.6)

27.6 (701.4)

26.9 (682.8) 23.6 (600)

LDSppp0680 26.9 (683.6)

32.3 (819.6)

31.5 (801.1)

30.7 (780.9)

30 (762.3)

LDSppp0720 28.5 (724)

33.9 (860)

33.1 (841.5)

32.3 (821.3)

31.6 (802.7) 28.3 (720)

LDSppp0760 30 (763)

35.4 (899)

34.7 (880.5)

33.9 (860.3)

33.1 (841.7) 29.9 (760)

LDSppp0880 34.8 (882.8)

40.1 (1018.8) 39.4 (1000.3)

38.6 (980.1)

37.9 (961.5) 34.6 (880)

2.31

LDSppp0920 36.3 (922.5)

41.7 (1058.5) 40.9 (1040)

40.1 (1019.8) 39.4 (1001.2) 36.2 (920)

58.8

LDSppp0960 37.9 (963.6)

43.3 (1099.6) 42.6 (1081.1)

41.8 (1060.9) 41 (1042.3)

b

b2

38

(1)

58.8

1.55 39.4

b

XUSLDM

b1

3URWHFWHG KHLJKW

17.4 (442.3)

2.31

H

H1

16.6 (420.4)

39.4

58

H

18.1 (460.8)

1.55

2.28

b2

LDSppp0320 12.8 (324.8) 1.5

H1

50

b1

LDSppp0280 11.2 (284.4)

58.8

1.97

b

37.8 (960)

44.9 (1140.2) 44.2 (1121.6) 40.9 (1040)

LDSppp1120 44.2 (1122.3) 49.5 (1258.3) 48.8 (1239.8)

48 (1219.6)

LDSppp1200 47.4 (1203.8) 52.7 (1339.8) 52 (1321.3)

51.2 (1301.1) 50.5 (1282.5) 47.2 (1200)

LDSppp1360 53.6 (1362)

57.5 (1459.3) 56.7 (1440.7) 53.5 (1360)

59 (1498)

58.2 (1479.5)

3

44.1 (1120)

LDSppp1400 55.2 (1401.7) 60.5 (1537.7) 59.8 (1519.2)

59 (1499)

3.04

LDSppp1520 59.9 (1521.5) 65.3 (1657.5) 64.5 (1639)

63.7 (1618.8) 63 (1600.2)

77.3

LDSppp1560 61.5 (1563.3) 66.9 (1699.3) 66.2 (1680.8)

65.4 (1660.6) 66.1 (1679.2) 61.4 (1560)

LDSppp1640 64.6 (1641.3) 70 (1777.3)

68.4 (1738.6) 67.7 (1720)

69.2 (1758.8)

2

26.8 (680)

LDSppp1040 41.1 (1042.9) 46.4 (1178.9) 45.7 (1160.4)

47.3 (1201)

1

58.3 (1480.4) 55.1 (1400) 59.8 (1520)

4

64.6 (1640)

LDSppp1720 67.7 (1720.8) 73.1 (1856.8) 72.4 (1838.3)

71.6 (1818.1) 70.8 (1799.5) 67.7 (1720)

LDSppp1800 71 (1802.9)

76.3 (1938.9) 75.6 (1920.4)

74.8 (1900.2) 74.1 (1881.6) 70.9 (1800)

LDSppp1920 75.7 (1922.8) 81.1 (2058.8) 80.3 (2040.3)

79.5 (2020.1) 78.8 (2001.5) 75.6 (1920)

LDSppp2120 83.5 (2120.7) 88.8 (2256.7) 88.1 (2237.5)

87.3 (2217.3) 86.6 (2198.7) 83.5 (2120)

5

(1) Flexible 4.33 in (0.11 m) long cable.

3URWHFWLRQWXEHIRUOLJKWFXUWDLQV;86/%;86/'0DQGVHJPHQWV;86/'6 XUSLZD7pppp 4.40

6

111.5

2.05

Ø0.28 Ø7

52.1

4.51 114.5

3.25

4.07

82.5

7

1.04 26.5

b

Ø80

b1

Ø3.15

103.5

1.46 37

XUS 3.66

2.83

LZD70280

93

72

4.09 104

4.86 123.5

5.43 138

3.88 98.5

Dual Dimensions:

Principle: page 3/88

Characteristics: page 3/90

b

b1

11.2 (284.4)

19.8 (502.8)

XUS LZD71040

b

b1

41.1 (1042.9)

49.7 (1261.3)

LZD70320

12.8 (324.8)

21.4 (543.2)

LZD71120

44.2 (1122.3)

52.8 (1340.7)

LZD70360

14.4 (364.5)

22.9 (582.9)

LZD71200

47.4 (1203.8)

56 (1422.2)

LZD70440

17.5 (443.9)

26.1 (662.3)

LZD71360

53.6 (1362)

62.2 (1580.4)

LZD70520

20.6 (523.4)

29.2 (741.8)

LZD71400

55.2 (1401.7)

63.8 (1620.1)

LZD70600

23.8 (604.1)

32.4 (822.5)

LZD71520

59.9 (1521.5)

68.5 (1739.9)

LZD70680

26.9 (683.6)

35.5 (902)

LZD71560

61.5 (1563.3)

70.1 (1781.7)

LZD70720

28.5 (724)

37.1 (942.4)

LZD71640

64.6 (1641.3)

73.2 (1859.2)

LZD70760

30 (763)

38.6 (981.4)

LZD71720

67.7 (1720.8)

76.3 (1939.2)

LZD70880

34.8 (882.8)

43.4 (1101.2)

LZD71800

71 (1802.9)

79.6 (2021.2)

LZD70920

36.3 (922.5)

44.9 (1140.9)

LZD71920

75.7 (1922.8)

84.3 (2141.2)

LZD70960

37.9 (963.6)

46.5 (1182)

LZD72120

83.5 (2120.7)

92.1 (2338.4)

INCHES

8

9

10

Millimieters

References: page 3/92

Dimensions: page 3/98

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/100

3/99

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Wiring diagrams

Safety light curtains, type 4

Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output

'LUHFWFRQQHFWLRQZLWK;86/%/'0ppp N

1

L F1

Earth

N

L

2

(1) GND

Earth 0 V 24 V

0 V 24 V MPCE/EDM Start

AUX

K1

To PLC (2)

(3)

3

4

7UDQVPLWWHU;86/%/'0

5HFHLYHU;86/%/'0

Power supply

Start

NC

K2

OSSD1

GND

OSSD2

0 V 24 V

MTS

MTS Ret

Test

K1

K2

(4)

(4)

(1) For testing prior to installation, the user can select MPCE/EDM OFF (default factory setting). In this case, the MPCE/EDM line must be connected to the 0 V line of the system. (2) The auxiliary output connects to a PLC (optional). (3) If remote start is not used, connect the start line to the 0 V line. (4) The K1 and K2 coils must be protected using the arc suppressors included in the documentation kit. Note: Relays K1 and K2 must have mechanically linked contacts.

5

&RQQHFWLRQYLDD3UHYHQWDŒ;36$)/PRGXOH Control panel

L K3

N

L F1

6

A1

C8 C7

F3

Start

K4

S33

S34

F4

13

S39

23

33

Control circuit

XPS AFL GND

N

L

T

Power supply

K1

K3

K2

K4

Logic

7

A2

GND 0 V 24 V

S11

S12

S11 S22

14 K3

To PLC (1)

24

34 K4

N

Test

8 GND 0 V 24 V MPCE/EDM

Start

AUX

OSSD1

GND

OSSD2

5HFHLYHU;86/%/'0 (2)

0 V 24 V

MTS

MTS Ret

7UDQVPLWWHU;86/%/'0

9 (1) The auxiliary output connects to a PLC (optional).   7KHOLJKWFXUWDLQPXVWEHFRQ¿JXUHGZLWK03&(('02))DQGZLWKDXWRPDWLFVWDUW

10

Note: Relays K1 and K2 must have mechanically linked contacts.

Principle: page 3/88

3/100

Characteristics: page 3/90

References: page 3/92

Dimensions: page 3/98

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/100

Wiring diagrams (continued)

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV Safety light curtains, type 4

Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output

7UDQVPLWWHU 7UDQVPLWWHUVWDWXVLQGLFDWRU MTS (1)

BK

1

WH

BU c0V

1

OK

7UDQVPLWWHUFRQQHFWRU MTS return (1)

BN c + 24 V

GR

2 1 Yellow LED

(1) Light curtain test input.

5HFHLYHU 5HFHLYHUFRQQHFWRU

3

5HFHLYHUVWDWXVLQGLFDWRU Start YE

MPCE/EDM RD Auxiliary output

OSSD2 WH GR

PK

BN

BU

c + 24 V

BK

4 1

2

3-4

c0V

OSSD1

5

1 Blanking: Orange LED 2 Interlock or Alarm: Yellow LED 3 - 4 Machine run: Green LED Machine stop: Red LED 3URJUDPPLQJDQGGLDJQRVWLFPRGXOH 'HVFULSWLRQDQGFRQQHFWLRQWROLJKWFXUWDLQV;86/%/'0

6

XUSLPDM 1

ENTER

7

2

XUS LPDM

8 1 Screen 2 Navigation button for displaying menus and selecting functions

9

10 Principle: page 3/88

Characteristics: page 3/90

References: page 3/92

Dimensions: page 3/98

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/100

3/101

Substitution table Light curtains with closest functionalities

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV Safety light curtains, type 4

Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output

/LJKWFXUWDLQV2SWLPXP 'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP 

1

2

3

4

Old light curtain XUSLTQ6A0260, XUSLTQ6B0260

1HZOLJKWFXUWDLQ XUSLBQ6A0280

XUSLTQ6A0350, XUSLTQ6B0350

XUSLBQ6A0320, XUSLBQ6A0360

XUSLTQ6A0435, XUSLTQ6B0435

XUSLBQ6A0440

XUSLTQ6A0520, XUSLTQ6B0520

XUSLBQ6A0520

XUSLTQ6A0610, XUSLTQ6B0610

XUSLBQ6A0600

XUSLTQ6A0700, XUSLTQ6B0700

XUSLBQ6A0720

XUSLTQ6A0785, XUSLTQ6B0785

XUSLBQ6A0760

XUSLTQ6A0870, XUSLTQ6B0870

XUSLBQ6A0880, XUSLBQ6A0920

XUSLTQ6A0955, XUSLTQ6B0955

XUSLBQ6A0960

XUSLTQ6A1045, XUSLTQ6B1045

XUSLBQ6A1040

XUSLTQ6A1130, XUSLTQ6B1130

XUSLBQ6A1120

XUSLTQ6A1215, XUSLTQ6B1215

XUSLBQ6A1200

XUSLTQ6A1305, XUSLTQ6B1390, XUSLTQ6A1390, XUSLTQ6B1390

XUSLBQ6A1360

'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP

5

6

7

8

Old light curtain

1HZOLJKWFXUWDLQ

XUSLTR5A0350, XUSLTR5B0350

XUSLBR5A0320, XUSLBR5A0360, XUSLBR5A0440

XUSLTR5A0520, XUSLTR5B0520

XUSLBR5A0520, XUSLBR5A0600

XUSLTR5A0700, XUSLTR5B0700

XUSLBR5A0680, XUSLBR5A0760

XUSLTR5A0870, XUSLTR5A0870,

XUSLBR5A0880, XUSLBR5A0920

XUSLTR5A1045, XUSLTR5B1045

XUSLBR5A1040

XUSLTR5A1215, XUSLTR5B1215

XUSLBR5A1200, XUSLBR5A1360

XUSLTR5A1390, XUSLTR5B1390

XUSLBR5A1400, XUSLBR5A1520

XUSLTR5A1570, XUSLTR5B1570

XUSLBR5A1560, XUSLBR5A1640

XUSLTR5A1745, XUSLTR5B1745

XUSLBR5A1720, XUSLBR5A1800

XUSLTR5A1920, XUSLTR5B1920

XUSLBR5A1920

XUSLTR5A2095, XUSLTR5B2095

XUSLBR5A2120

Note: the characteristics of the ranges (optics, connections, dimensions, mounting, functions, etc.) are not exactly the same. Please refer to the detailed characteristics of the XUSLBppppppp and XUSLDppppppp ranges and associated accessories when replacing a light curtain from the XUSLTppppppp range.

9

10

3/102

Substitution table Light curtains with closest functionalities

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Safety light curtains, type 4

Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output

/LJKWFXUWDLQV8QLYHUVDO 'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP

XUSLTY5A0520, XUSLTY5B0520

1HZOLJKWFXUWDLQ XUSLDMY5A0320, XUSLDMY5A0360, XUSLDMY5A0440 XUSLDMY5A0520, XUSLDMY5A0600

XUSLTY5A0700, XUSLTY5B0700

XUSLDMY5A0680, XUSLDMY5A0760

XUSLTY5A0870, XUSLTY5B0870

XUSLDMY5A0880, XUSLDMY5A0920

XUSLTY5A1045, XUSLTY5B1045

XUSLDMY5A1040

XUSLTY5A1215, XUSLTY5B1215

XUSLDMY5A1200, XUSLDMY5A1360

XUSLTY5A1390, XUSLTY5B1390

XUSLDMY5A1400, XUSLDMY5A1520

XUSLTY5A1570, XUSLTY5B1570

XUSLDMY5A1560, XUSLDMY5A1640

XUSLTY5A1745, XUSLTY5B1745

XUSLDMY5A1720, XUSLDMY5A1800

XUSLTY5A1920, XUSLTY5B1920

XUSLDMY5A1920

XUSLTY5A2095, XUSLTY5B2095

XUSLDMY5A2120

Old light curtain XUSLTY5A0350, XUSLTY5B0350

Note: Caution, the characteristics of the ranges (optics, connections, dimensions, mounting, functions, etc.) are not exactly the same. Please refer to the detailed characteristics of the XUSLBppppppp and XUSLDppppppp ranges and associated accessories when replacing a light curtain from the XUSLTppppppp range.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3/103

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Operating principle

1

Connection module Preventa™ XPSLCM1 For “muting” function on light curtains type XUSLDM c + 24 V

Sensors

1

“Muting” indicator light

2

When the system is switched on by the start command and the light curtain protection not interrupted, the main circuit is closed by the safety outputs of the XUSLDM light curtain (solid-state safety outputs). In addition to the safety outputs, the light curtain incorporates signalling LEDs and an auxiliary output (alarm or status signalling) for sending system status information to the PLC. Four LEDs on the light curtain and one on the front face of connection module XPSLCM1 provide information on the safety circuit status.

3

$QLQWHUUXSWLRQRIWKHSURWHFWLRQ¿HOGPRQLWRUHGE\WKHHOHFWURVHQVLWLYHSURWHFWLRQ equipment causes instantaneous opening of the safety outputs; the process PLC receives a stop command and the LED display mounted on the front face indicates the change of state of the safety circuits. The “open” state is maintained until the light EHDPVDUHXQREVWUXFWHGDQGLILQFOXGHGLQWKHOLJKWFXUWDLQFRQ¿JXUDWLRQWKH6WDUW key switch operated.

Receiver

Transmitter

4

The “muting” function cannot be activated by supplying the “muting” sensors unless the safety outputs have been closed beforehand. To trigger the “muting” function, the ³PXWLQJ´GHYLFHVPXVWEHDFWLYDWHGZLWKLQWKHFRQ¿JXUDEOHWLPHLQWHUYDO (50 milliseconds to 5 seconds in increments of 50 milliseconds). During the activated ³PXWLQJ´SKDVHPDWHULDOVFDQEHWUDQVSRUWHGWKURXJKWKHSURWHFWLRQ¿HOGZLWKRXW deactivating the safety outputs. In the event of intrusion into the hazardous zone, a person cannot activate the “muting” sensors in the same way and the system stops. While the “muting” function is activated, a “muting” status indicator light is controlled by the connection module XPSLCM1. A fault at indicator light level (short-circuit, open circuit) is immediately recognized and deactivates the “muting” function. The indicator light only illuminates when a “muting” signal is generated and indicates the inhibition of the protection function.

5

6 “Muting” indication Entry direction

7

Hazardous zone

ESPE (Light curtain)

m A

D

B

C

Materials trolley

Materials trolley

dM

8

2SHUDWLQJSULQFLSOH Universal XUSLDM light curtains have an integrated “muting” function that is FRQ¿JXUDEOHXVLQJWKHSURJUDPPLQJDQGGLDJQRVWLFPRGXOH;86/3'07KLV function enables the automatic passage of parts for machining or loaded pallets, without interrupting the transportation movement within the zone protected by the electro-sensitive protection equipment (ESPE) system. In addition to the safety light curtain, a connection module XPSLCM1, which is connected directly to the top of the light curtain receiver, enables the cabling of 2 to 4 “muting” sensors as well as an LQGLFDWRUOLJKW,QWKHHYHQWRIDVHTXHQFHHUURUWKH³PXWLQJ´LQGLFDWRUOLJKWÀDVKHV (1 second interval) and turning the Start key switch off and back on restarts the system.

&RQGLWLRQVWREHREVHUYHGIRUWKH³0XWLQJ´IXQFWLRQ b The “muting” sensors must either be v thru-beam: XUK 0ARCTL2 (sensing distance 98.4 ft (30 m)) + XUK 0ARCTL2T v SRODULVHGUHÀH[;8.$5&7/VHQVLQJGLVWDQFHIWP UHÀHFWRU;8=& or mechanical limit switches with contacts. b dM )m to obtain continuous validation of the “muting” function. b Avoid the intrusion of persons during the “muting” phase. This phase is indicated by the indicator light connected to the “muting” indicator output of connection module XPSLCM1. b A materials trolley must provide the “muting” signal before entering the protection ¿HOGDQGFHDVHLWRQFHLWKDVFOHDUHGDOOWKHVHQVRUVRIWKHSURWHFWLRQ¿HOGRQH[LWLQJ

ESPE: electro-sensitive protection equipment (light curtain). A, B, D, C: “muting” sensors. m: trolley length and dM = distance between A, B and D, C.

9

10 Principle: page 3/104

3/104

Characteristics: page 3/105

References: page 3/106

Dimensions: page 3/106

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/107

Characteristics

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

1

Connection module Preventa™ XPSLCM1 For “muting” function on light curtains type XUSLDM

&KDUDFWHULVWLFV &RQQHFWLRQPRGXOHW\SH &HUWL¿FDWLRQV 3URGXFWGHVLJQHGIRUPD[ XVHLQVDIHW\UHODWHGSDUWV RIFRQWUROV\VWHPV $PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH

'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ conforming to IEC 529

XPSLCM1

For operation For storage

1

e, TÜV, CSA, UL Category 4

Conforming to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1 ƒ)ƒ& ƒ)ƒ&

Terminals Enclosure

32…+ 131 (0…+ 55) - 13…+ 167 (- 25…+ 75)

2

IP 20 IP 20

3RZHUVXSSO\E\OLJKWFXUWDLQ Voltage XUSLDM Maximum current 0D[LPXPFRQVXPSWLRQ

V mA W

c 24 (- 20…+ 20 30 0.7

5DWHGLQVXODWLRQYROWDJH(Ui)

V

500

5DWHGLPSXOVHZLWKVWDQGYROWDJH(Uimp) 6KRFNUHVLVWDQFH Conforming to IEC 68-2-6 9LEUDWLRQUHVLVWDQFH Conforming to IEC 68-2-29 1XPEHURIOLJKWFXUWDLQVWKDWFDQEHFRQQHFWHG ,QSXWVIRU³PXWLQJ´VHQVRUV - number of inputs to be monitored - supply voltage of sensors - output current of each sensor 7\SHRI³PXWLQJ´VHQVRUV 6\QFKURQL]DWLRQWLPHRI³PXWLQJ´VHQVRUV 0D[LPXP³PXWLQJ´WLPH 6DIHW\RXWSXWV - number and type - breaking capacity of outputs ³0XWLQJ´LQGLFDWRUOLJKWRXWSXW ³0XWLQJ´LQGLFDWRUOLJKWSRZHU ³0XWLQJ´LQGLFDWRUOLJKWW\SH 6LJQDOOLQJ

N9 JQ JQ

1.1 6 (10...55 Hz) 10 (16 ms) 1 transmitter-receiver pair

&RQQHFWLRQ 1-wire connection

2-wire connection

Type Without cable end With cable end With cable end Without cable end Without cable end

V mA PV PLQ

mA W

3

2 to 4 per “muting” function c 24 < 20 7KUXEHDPSRODUL]HGUHÀH[RUVHQVRUVZLWKYROWIUHHFRQWDFWV WRFRQ¿JXUDEOHLQOLJKWFXUWDLQ;86/'0LQLQFUHPHQWVRIPV 2 or unlimited

4

2 PNP (terminals 1 and 2) 30 V/100 1 NPN 1 to 7 max. /('RU¿ODPHQWEXOE 1 LED

5

Captive screw clamp terminals, non removable 6ROLGRUÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*PP2) :LWKRXWEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*PP2) :LWKEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*PP2) :LWKRXWEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*PP2) 'RXEOHZLWKEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*PP2)

6

7

8

9

10 Principle: page 3/104

Characteristics: page 3/105

References: page 3/106

Dimensions: page 3/106

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/107

3/105

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Description, references, dimensions

1

Connection module Preventa™ XPSLCM1 For “muting” function on light curtains type XUSLDM

'HVFULSWLRQ XPSLCM1 To aid diagnostics, the connection module has 1 LED on the front face 1.

1 Lamp PE +VDC 0VDC RET +RS

1 Status

2 S3S1 S2S4

5HIHUHQFHV

3

&RQQHFWLRQPRGXOH 'HVFULSWLRQ

&RQQHFWLRQ PRGXOHIRU ³PXWLQJ´ IXQFWLRQ

4

7\SHRI WHUPLQDO EORFN FRQQHFWLRQ Non removable

6XSSO\ ³0XWLQJ´ LQGLFDWRUOLJKW RXWSXW

5HIHUHQFH

c 24 V

XPSLCM1

1 NPN

:HLJKW R]NJ 6.70 (0.190)

6SDUHSDUWV 'HVFULSWLRQ

5

6

Power W

5HIHUHQFH

³0XWLQJ´LQGLFDWRUOLJKWNLW(1) 5

XSZCM01

5HSODFHPHQWEXOEVIRU ³PXWLQJ´LQGLFDWRUOLJKWNLW comprising one lot of 10 replacement bulbs and 1 removal/insertion tool XBF X13

XSZCM02

1 to 7

:HLJKW R]NJ 0.42 (0.012) 0.56 (0.016)

 ;9%RU;9'ZLWKVWHDG\OLJKW/('RU¿ODPHQWEXOEFDQDOVREHXVHG

'LPHQVLRQV XPSLCM1 Mounting on 35 mm rail

7

Lamp PE +VDC 0VDC RET +RS

3.9 Status

99.1

S3S1 S2S4

8

4.5

.9

114.3

22.5

³0XWLQJ´LQGLFDWRUOLJKWNLW;6=&0

9

.43 11

1.7 44

1.2 31

Ø.70

10

Ø18

(1) Dual Dimensions:

(1) Faston connector 4.7.

Principle: page 3/104

3/106

Characteristics: page 3/105

References: page 3/106

Dimensions: page 3/106

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/107

INCHES Millimieters

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Wiring diagrams

1

Connection module Preventa™ XPSLCM1 For “muting” function on light curtains type XUSLDM

&RQQHFWLRQRIOLJKWFXUWDLQV;86/'0ZLWKFRQQHFWLRQPRGXOH;36/&0 ([DPSOHFRQ¿JXUDWLRQZLWKOLJKWFXUWDLQV;86/'0 N

1

L

F1

N

L

7UDQVPLWWHU;86/'0

5HFHLYHU;86/'0

2

ABL 8RPS Dedicated power supply

(1) 0V

24 V

GND 0 V

24 V MPCE/EDM Start AUX OSSD1

OSSD2

GND

0V

K1

(3) K2

6WDUW

NC

3

7HVW

To PLC (2) K1

24 V MTS MTS Ret. Rer

K2

(4)

(4)

OG

4 BN c+V

BU S1-In

+

Sensor A’ PNP dark switching

–

BK A

5 OG

BR

XPS LCM1

BU Return

S1-In

BN BU

–RS485

S1-In

6

OG

S1-In

Sensor B’ PNP light switching

–

BK A

WH +RS485

+

OG

BN BU

+

Sensor C’ PNP dark switching

–

BK A

Lamp

Shield

7

OG

BK

BN GND

BU

+ –

BK A

Sensor D’ PNP light switching

“Muting” indicator light

8

(1) For testing prior to installation, the user can select MPCE/EDM OFF (default factory setting). In this case, the MPCE/EDM line must be connected to the 0 V line of the system. (2) The auxiliary output connects to a PLC (optional). (3) If remote start is not used, connect the start line to the 0 V line. (4) The K1 and K2 coils must be protected using the arc suppressors included in the documentation kit.

9

10 Principle: page 3/104

Characteristics: page 3/105

References: page 3/106

Dimensions: page 3/106

Wiring Diagrams: page 3/107

3/107

Functional diagrams

6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV

Connection module Preventa™ XPSLCM1 For “muting” function on light curtains type XUSLDM

)XQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPRIOLJKWFXUWDLQ;86/'0ZLWKFRQQHFWLRQPRGXOH;36/&0

1

³6WDUWUHVWDUWLQWHUORFN´PRGHZLWKVHQVRUV Power supply

,QKLELWLRQPLQ«’

1 Light curtain interrupted

1 Light curtain interrupted

&RQ¿JXUDWLRQRIPRGXOH

t 50…500 ms

t